Buick 1993 Park Avenue Owners Manual Owner's

2015-10-23

: Buick Buick-1993-Buick-Park-Avenue-Owners-Manual-812879 buick-1993-buick-park-avenue-owners-manual-812879 buick pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 340 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

i
I
'Id?
I
,\!la
I1
I
..
The
1993
Buick Park Avenue
Owner's Manual
Litho
in
U.S.A.
Part
No.
25603705
B
First Edition @Copyright General Motors Corporation 1992
All
Rights Reserved
1
GENERAL MOTORS, GM and the GM Emblem,
BUICK, and the BUICK Emblem are registered
trademarks
of
General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in
the
product after that time without further
notice.
For vehicles
first
sold
in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors
of Canada Limited” for Buick Motor Division whenever it
appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your Buick,
so
it
will be there if
you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you sell the
vehicle, please leave this manual in
it
so
the new owner can
use it.
VOLUNTARY TECHNKIAN
WE
SUPPORT
CERTIFICAT’WN THROUGH
Nabonal
lnstttute
for
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
We support voluntary
technician certification.
For Canadian Owners Who Prefer
a
French Language Manual:
Aux propri6taires canadiens:
Vous
pouvez vous procurer
un
exemplaire de ce guide en fraqais chez votre
concessionaire ou
B
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.,
1500
Bonhill
Rd.,
Mississauga, Ontario L5T lC7.
A
3
Walter
Marr
and
Thomas
Buick
Buick’s chief engineer, Walter
L.
Man- (left), and
Thomas D. Buick, son of founder David Dunbar Buick,
drove the first Flint Buick in a successful Flint-Detroit
round trip in July 1904.
David Buick was building gasoline engines by
1899,
and Marr, his .engineer, apparently built the first auto to
be called
a
Buick in 1900. However, Buick traditionally
dates its beginnings to
1903.
That was the year the
company was reorganized, refinanced and moved from
Detroit to Flint. Buick has always been a product
innovator. Buick engineers developed the
4
Durant also created a racing team that won
500
racing
trophies in 1909 and 1910, including successes at
Indianapolis two years before the Indy
500
began.
The success of Buick engines was visible not only
on
the race track, but in endurance tests across the country
and around the world. Buick was the only car to
complete a
1,000-mile
Chicago-to-New York race in
1906.
And
a Buick was the fist car to travel across
South America, driven from Buenos Aires, Argentina,
over the Andes to Santiago, Chile in 19 14.
1911
Model
21
Touring
Car
Buick drew plenty of attention because it could climb
hills and
run
through mud like no other car. Buick’s
endurance and reliability were world famous.
During World War
I,
Buick built Liberty aircraft engines
as well as Red Cross ambulances
so
successful that one
Buick ambulance was awarded the Croix de Guerre by
the French government.
As a builder
of
premier automobiles, Buick was hard hit
by the Great Depression. However, new General
Manager Harlow H. Curtice created.popular new models
including the Special and the Roadmaster. Buick sales
soon flourished.
First Buick Factory
3
In
World War
11,
Buick built aircraft engines, tanks and
other military hardware. This post-war period brought
great styling and engineering changes which resulted
in
increased sales. The torque converter automatic
transmission, Dynaflow, was introduced in the
1948
Roadmaster. Buick’s famous “portholes” came along
in
1949.
I949
Roadmaster
A
high=cornpression
V-X
engine was introduced in
1953.
And Buick’s famous vertical pillar
“toothy”
grille
(introduced
in
1942)’
became more massive
in
the
post-war era.
r
--
I
I
1953
Skylark
6
Motor Trend magazine named
the
1962
Buick Special
“Car
of
the Year”. The first production
V-6
engine was
used
in
the Special.
I962
Buick Special
Built inside the walls of the old buildings in Buick’s
former Flint complex, which formed the cornerstone
of
General Motors, Buick City
is
a state-of-the-art
assembly facility with more than
200
robots and other
high-tech equipment. It was completed
in
the fall
of
1985.
Buicks are, and will continue to be, premium American
motorcars with smooth power, high performance, rich
detail and comfortable accommodation.
Ed
Mertz, General Manager, Buick Motor
Division
Our mission
is
simple:
“Buick
will
provide Premium American Motorcars
backed
with
services that exceed our customers’
expectations, throughout the purchase, ownership,
service and repurchase experience.”
Buicks are SUBSTANTIAL.
Buicks are DISTINCTIVE.
Buicks are POWERFUL.
Buicks are MATURE.
7
@
Table
of
Contents
HowtoUsethisManual
................................................................
10
1
This part tells you how to use your manual and includes safety and vehicle damage warnings
&
symbols.
13
This part tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly.
This part explains how to start and operate your Buick.
This part tells you how to adjust the ventilation
&
comfort controls and how to operate your sound system.
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions.
This part tells you what to do if you have a problem
while
driving, such as a flat tire
or
engine overheating.
Here the manual tells you how to keep your Buick running properly and looking good.
This part tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use.
This part tells you how to contact Buick for assistance and how to get service publications. It also gives
you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page 315.
Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual.
You
can use
it
to quickly find
something you want to read.
SeatsandSafetyBelts
..................................................................
13
FeaturesandControls
..................................................................
59
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
.....................................................
129
YourDrivingandtheRoad
..............................................................
159
ProblemsontheRoad
..................................................................
209
Service and Appearance Care..
..........................................................
241
Maintenanceschedule
..................................................................
293
Customer Assistance Information
........................................................
313
Index
................................................................................
321
How
to
Use
This
Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. This
will help
you
learn about the features and controls for
your vehicle. In this manual,
you’ll
find that pictures
and words work together to explain things quickly.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You
will find a number of safety cautions
in
this book.
We
use
yellow and the word
CAUTION
to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
I
In the yellow caution area, we tell
you
what
the
hazard
is. Then we
tell
you what
to
do to help avoid or reduce
the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you
or others could be hurt.
You
will
also
find
a
red circle with
a
slash through it in
:his book.
This safety symbol means
“Don’t,” “Don’t do this,”
or “Don’t let this happen.”
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these blue notices:
WTICE:
In the blue notice area, we tell you about something that
can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage
would not
be
covered by your warranty, and it could be
costly. But the notice will tell
you
what to do
to
help
avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals,
you
might
see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or
in different words. In this manual, we’ve used the
familiar words and colors that Buick has used for years.
You’ll also see warning labels
on
your vehicle. They use
the same colors, and the words CAUTION or NOTICE.
11
!
!
Vehicle
Symbols
These
are
some
of
the symbols you will
find
on
your
vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
POSSIBLE
A
CAUTION
INJURY
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
CAUSTIC
ACID COULD
BATTERY
CAUSE
BURNS
SPARK
OR
,\I/,
COULD
FLAME
EXPLODE
BATTERY
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
FASTEN SEAT
4
BELTS
POWER
WINDOW
These symbols
have to do with
your lights:
LIGHTS
PC
HIGH BEAM
OR
=
=o
FOG LAMPS
$0
These symbols
are on some
of
your controls:
WINDSHIELD
'
'
'
WASHER
l0
'r'
-1
WINDSHIELD
6$
WASHER
8
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
VENTILATING
FAN
3f
HEADLAMP
-
WIPER
-
WASHER
iQ
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
COOLANT
F-
TEMP
--
ENGINE
RADIATOR
a
COOLANT
FUEL
ENGINE OIL
wb
PRESSURE
TEMP
OIL
&4
ANTILOCK
(a)
BRAKE
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
FUSE
RADIO
>
VOLUME
HATCHBACK
e
TRUNK
RELEASE
LIGHTER
1-1
HORN
)tr
SPEAKER
b
Memory Seat and Mirrors (Option)
If your Buick has this option, the control looks like this:
I
You can use this when you want to save a seat and
mirror adjustment.
Here’s how to make it work:
1.
Adjust the driver’s seat to your desired position.
Adjust both outside mirrors to suit you. See “Outside
Mirrors”
in
the Index.
2.
Press the SET button, and then one of the two
memory buttons within
5
seconds. You will hear one
beep when you press the set button, and two beeps
when
you
press the memory button to confirm that
the mirror and seat positions are entered in memory.
Now it’s set. When your Buick
is
in PARK with the
ignition
ON,
push the memory button you just set and
the seat and mirrors will go to where you’ve just set
them. With the ignition
OFF,
the system will work in
any shift lever position.
To
do
the same thing for a second driver, follow the
steps above but use the other memory button.
If you hit the wrong memory setting, or if there is a third
driver, the seat adjuster will still work,
so
you can adjust
the seat to where
you
want
it.
The EXIT button allows you to get out of the car more
easily. Push it while you’re
in
PARK
with the ignition
ON,
or anytime with the ignition
OFF,
to make the seat
go
all the way down and back. Also,
you
will hear a
beep when the EXIT button is pushed.
15
Reclining Front Seatback(s)
To
adjust the seatback, lift the lever on the outer side
of
the seat. Release the lever to lock the seatback where
you want it. Pull up on the lever and the seat will
go
to
its upright position.
If
you
have the power
option, it works with the
switch on the side
of
the
seat. Push it back to recline
the seat, push it forward to
return the seatback to the
up position.
But don't have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
A
CAUTION:
Sitting in
a
reclined position when your vehicle is
in
motion can
be
dangerous. Even
if
you buckle
up,
your
safety
belts can’t do their
job
when
you’re reclined like this.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
I
CAUTION:
(Continued)
The shoulder
belt
can’t do its job because
it
won’t
be
against
you*dy. Instead, it
will
be
in
front
of
you. In
a
crash you
could
go
into it,
receiving neck
or other Injuries.
The
lap
belt can’t
do
Its
job
either. In
a
crash the
belt could
go
up
over
your
abdomen. The belt
forces waul’d
be
there,
not
at
your
pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
Far
proper protectiun when
the
vehicle is in
motion,
have
the
seatback
upright. Then sit
well
back
in
the seat and wear your
safety
belt
properly.
I
Head
Restraints
Slide the head restraint up or down
so
that the top
of
the
restraint is closest to the top
of
your ears.
I
A
CAUTION:
I
Don’t let anyone ride where they can’t wear a
safety belt properly.
If
you are
in
a crash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries can
be much worse. You can
hit
things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from
it.
You can be
seriously injured or killed.
In
the same crash, you
I
might not be
if
you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passengers’
belts are fastened properly too.
This position reduces the chance
of
a neck injury in
a
crash.
when
you
turn the
key
to “Run” or “Start”
when your
safety
belt
isn’t buckled, and
you’ll hear a tone, too.
It’s the reminder to
buckle up.
In many states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash.
If
you do have a
crash,
you
don’t know if
it
will be a bad one.
A
few crashes are very mild. In them, you won’t get hurt
even
if
you’re not buckled up. And some crashes can be
so
serious, like being hit by
a
train, that even buckled up
a person wouldn’t survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people who buckle up can
survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they
could be badly hurt or killed.
After
25
years
of
safety belts in vehicles, the facts are
clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter
...
a lot!
19
Why
Safety
Belts
Work
When
you
ride in
or
on
anything,
you
go
as
fast
as
it
goes.
When the bike hits the block, it stops. But the child
keeps
going!
For
example,
if
the bike is going
10
mph
(16
km/h),
so
is the child.
20
I
Take the simplest “car.” Suppose
it’s
just
a
seat
on
wheels.
I
..
‘E
Put
someone
on
it.
21
1
--
“1
7
L
h
a
V
A
--
J
1
it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop
the
“car.” The rider doesn’t
stop. The person keeps going until stopped
by
something.
In
a real vehicle, it
could
be
the windshield
...
22
or the instrument panel
...
or the safety belts!
k
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You
get more time to stop.
You
stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
23
Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts
--
and the
Answers
@
Won’t
I
be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You
could be
--
whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can easily unbuckle a safety
belt, even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident,
so
you
can
unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Why don’t they just put in air bags
so
people
won’t have to wear safety belts?
A:
“Air bags,” or Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
systems, are in some vehicles today and will be in
more of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only
--
so
they work with
safety belts, not instead
of
them. Every “air bag”
system ever offered for sale has required the
use
of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has
“
air bags,” you still have to buckle up to get the
most protection. That’s true not only in frontal
collisions, but especially in side and other
collisions.
&:
If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You
may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident
--
even one that isn’t your fault
--
you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect
you
from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within
25
miles
(40
km) of home.
And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths
occur at speeds of less than
40
mph
(65
kmh).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
How
To
Adults
Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
A
CAUTION:
There are special things to know about safety
belts and children. And there are different rules
for babies and smaller children.
If
a child will be
riding in your Buick, see the section after this
one, called “Children.” Follow those rules for
everyor
-s
protection.
..,
.*..
.. .
When the key .is turned to “Run” or “Start,” a light will
come on for about eight seconds toxemind people to
c
fasten their safety belts. Unless the driver’s Safety belt is
First,
you911
want
to
know
which
restraint
systems
your
buckled, a tone will also sound. vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
I
25
Driver Position
This section describes the driver's restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder
Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here's how
to
wear
it
properly.
1.
Close
and lock the door.
2.
Adjust the seat
(to
see how, see "Seats"
in
the
Index)
so
you can sit
up
straight.
d
n
3.
Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
4.
Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section:
Make sure the release button on the buckle faces
upward or outward
so
you would be able to unbuckle
it quickly if you ever had to.
The lap part of the belt should be low and snug below
the hips, just touching the thighs.
In
a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These
parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
27
The safety belt locks if there's a sudden stop or a crash.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
E
You can move the shoulder belt adjuster
to
the height
that is right for you.
To
move it up or down, squeeze the release handle.
When
you
release the handle, try
to
move it down a
to
make sure it has locked into position. little
You can move the adjuster up
from
a lower position
by
pushing the bottom
of
the release handle.
28
.^.
To
help
you
find a height that is right for
you,
follow
these guidelines:
For a tall person: Use the upper or upper-middle
position.
For a person
of
average height: Use a position
somewhere
in
the middle.
For a short person: Use the lower
or
lower-middle
position.
Adjust the height
so
that the shoulder portion
of
the belt
is properly positioned on your shoulder, away from your
face and neck.
29
@
What’s wrong with this?
P
30
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as
much protection this way.
A
CAUTION:
You
can
be
seriously
hurt
if
your
shoulder
belt
too
loose.
In
a
crash
yow
would
move
fowuard
too much,
which
could
Increase
hjury.
The
shoulder
belt
should
fit
against
your
body.
is
You can be seriously injured
if
your belt
is
buckled
in
the wrong place like this.
In
a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there,
not
at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest
you.
A:
The
belt
is
buckled
in
the
wrong
place.
31
A:
The shoulder belt
is
worn under the
arm.
It
should
be worn over the shoulder
at
all times.
A
CAUTION:
I
You can be seriously injured
if
you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm.
In
a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also,
the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren't
as
strong
as
shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs
like your liver or spleen.
.
I*.,,.
e."
What's wrong with this?
A:
The belt
is
twisted across the body.
A
CAUTION:
You
can
be
seriously
injured
by
a
twisted
belt.
In
a
crash,
you
wouldn't
have
the
full
width
of
the
belt
to
take
impact
forces.
If
a
belt
is
twisted,
make
it
straight
so
It
can
work
properly,
or
ask
your
dealer
to
fix
it.
To
unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should
go
back out
of
the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way.
If
you slam the door on it, you can damage both
the belt
and
your vehicle.
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
System/Supplemental Restraint
System
(Air
Bag)
This section explains the driver's Supplemental
Inflatable Restraint (SIR)/Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) system, commonly referred to as an air
bag. Here are the most important things to know:
A
CAUTION:
I
Even
with
an
air
bag,
if
you're
not
wearing
a
safety
belt
and
you're
in
a
crash,
your
injuries
may
be
much
worse.
Air
bags
are
hot
designed
to
inflate
in
rallovers
or
in
rear,
slde
or
low-speed
frsntal
crashes.
You
need
to
wear
your
safety
belt
to
reduce
the
chance
of hitting
things
insJde
the
vehicle
or
being
ejected
from
it.
Always
wear
your
safety
belt,
even
with
an
air
bag.
34
A
CAUTION:
Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an’eye. If you’re too close to an inflating
air bag,
it
could seriously injure you. Safety belts
help keep you
in
position for an air bag inflation
in
a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even
with an air bag, and sit as far back as you can
while still maintaining control
of
your vehicle.
Air Bag System Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
’
panel, which shows “INFL REST” or “INFLATABLE
RESTRAINT”. The system checks itself and the light
tells you
if
there is a problem.
INFLATABLE
INFL.
RESTRAINT
REST.
You
will see this light flash for a few seconds when you
turn your ignition
to
“Run” or “Start.” Then the light
should
go
out, which means the system is ready.
A
CAUTION:
F
the air bag readiness light doesn’t come on
when you start your vehicle, or stays on, or
comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
35
How
The
Air
Bag
System
Works
When
is
an
air
bag
expected to inflate?
The air bag is designed to inflate in moderate
to
severe
frontal or near-frontal crashes. The air bag will only
inflate if the velocity
of
the impact is above
the
designed
threshold level. When impacting straight into a wall that
does not move or deform, the threshold level for most
GM
vehicles is between
9
and
14
mph. However, this
velocity threshold depends on the vehicle design and
may be several miles-per-hour faster or slower. In
addition, this threshold velocity will be considerably
higher if the vehicle strikes an object such as a parked
car which will move and deform on impact.
The
air bag
is also not designed to inflate
in
rollovers, side impacts,
or rear impacts where the inflation would provide
no
occupant protection benefit.
In any particular crash, the determination of whether the
,
air bag should have inflated cannot be based solely on
the level of damage on the vehicle(s). Inflation is
Where
is
the
air
bag?
The driver's air bag is
in
the
middle
of
the steering
wheel.
determined by the angle of the impact and the vehicle's
deceleration, of which vehicle damage is
only
one
indication. Repair cost
is
not a good indicator
of
whether an air bag should have deployed.
What makes an air bag inflate?
In
a
frontal impact of sufficient severity, sensors
strategically located
on
the vehicle detect that the
vehicle is suddenly stopping as a result
of
a
crash. These
sensors complete an electrical circuit, triggering a
chemical reaction
of
the sodium azide sealed in the
inflator. The reaction produces nitrogen gas, which
inflates the cloth bag. The inflator, cloth bag, and related
hardware are all part of the air bag inflator module
packed inside the steering wheel.
How
does
an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel.
The air bag supplements the protection provided by
safety belts. Air bags distribute the force
of
the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. But air bags would not
provide protection in many types
of
collisions, including
rollovers and rear and side impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward the air bag. Air bags
should never be regarded as anything more than a
supplement
to
safety belt protection in moderate
to
severe frontal and near-frontal collisions.
What will
you
see after an air bag inflation?
After the air bag has inflated, it will then quickly
deflate. This
occurs
so
quickly that some people may
not even realize that the air bag inflated. The air bag will
-
not impede the driver’s vision or ability to steer the
vehicle,
nor
will it hinder the occupants from exiting the
vehicle. There will be small amounts
of
smoke coming
from vents in the deflated air bag. Some components of
the air bag module in the steering wheel hub may be hot
for
a
short time, but the portion of the bag that comes
into contact with you will not be hot to the touch. The
nitrogen gas used to inflate the air bag will have vented
into the passenger compartment, and the bag will be
deflated within seconds after the collision. Nitrogen
,makes up about
80%
of the air we breathe and is not
hazardous. As the nitrogen vents from the bag, small
particles are also vented into the passenger
compartment.
37
A
CAUTION:
a
*
Don’t
attach
anything to the steering
whwl
pad.
It
might injure the driver
if
the
air
bag
inflates.
The
air
bag
is
designed
to inflate only
once.
After
it
inflates, you’ll
need
some
new
parts
for your
air
bag
system. If
you
don’t
get
them, the
air
bag system won’t
be
there to
help
protect you
in
another crash.
A
new
system
will
include
the air
bag
module and
possibly other
parts.
The service manual
has information
about
the need ta replace
other
parts.
Let only
qualified
technicians
work
on
your
air
bag system. Improper service
can
mean
that your
air bag
system won’t work
properly.
See
your
dealer
for
service.
I-
D
Servicing Your Buick with the Air Bag
System
Please
tell
or remind anyone who works on your Buick
that it has the air bag system. There are parts
of
the air
bag system in several places around your vehicle. You
don’t want the system
to
inflate while someone is
working
on
your vehicle.
The
air
bag
system does
not
need regular maintenance. Your Buick dealer and the
1993
Park Avenue Service Manual have information
about the air bag system, including repair or disposal.
A
CAUTION:
For up to
2
minutes after the ignition key is
turned
off
and the battery disconnected, an air
bag can still inflate during improper service. You
can be injured
if
you are close to an air bag when
it inflates. Be sure to follow the proper service
procedures.
When electrical work is done under the hood or inside
your vehicle,
the
ignition should be in “Lock” if
possible.
Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape, or yellow
connectors. They are probably part
of
the air bag
system.
But
if the ignition has to be on for electrical work,
or
if
the steering column is
to
be disassembled, the air bag
system must be disconnected.
To
do this:
Turn
off
the ignition.
Remove the SlR/SRS (air bag)
fuse
(see “Fuses and
Circuit Breakers” in the Index).
Disconnect the yellow connector at the base
of
the
steering column.
When the work is complete, if the air bag system was
disconnected, be sure to reattach everything and replace
the fuse before turning the ignition on. When you turn
the ignition key on, be sure
you
see the inflatable
restraint light
on
the instrument panel. If you don’t see
this light flash and then go
out
as usual, have your air
bag system repaired.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely
to
be
seriously injured if
they
don’t wear safety belts.
A
pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low
as
possible
throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt
is
worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone,
the
key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position Center Passenger Position
n
U
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt. See “Driver Positi,on,”
earlier in this part.
When the lap portion
of
the
belt
is
pulled out all the
way, it will lock. If it does, let it
go
back all the way and
start
again.
Be
sure to use the correct buckle when buckling your
lap-shoulder belt. If you find that the latch plate will not
go
fully into the buckle, see
if
you are using the buckle
for the center passenger position.
I
U
i
When you sit in a center seating position, you have a lap
safety belt, which has no retractor.
To
make the belt
longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.
To
make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.
If
the
belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender’’ at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle faces upward
or outward
so
you would be able to unbuckle it quickly
if you ever had to.
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more
often
in crashes
than
those who are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out
of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger P.ositions
41
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear
one
properly.
-
Extender”
at
the end of this section, Make sure the
release button
on
the buckle faces upward or
outward
so
you
would be able to unbuckle it quickly
if you ever had to.
n
n
1.
Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
2.
Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
When the lap belt is pulled out all the way, it will
lock.
If
it does, let it go back all the way and start
again. If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Don’t let it get twisted.
The
lap part
of
the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs.
In
a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These
parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
The safety belt
locks
if there’s a sudden stop
or
a crash.
I
A
CAUTION:
I
You can be seriously hurt
if
your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
I
To
unlatch the belt, just push the button on the
buckle.
43
Children
Everyone in. a vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult size.
In
fact,
the law in every state and Canadian province says
.
children up to some age must be restrained while in a
vehicle.
Smaller Children and Babies
A
CAUTION:
Smaller children and babies should always be
restrained
in
a child or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraint will say whether
it
is
the right type and size for your child.
A
very
young child's hip bones are
so
small that a
regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as
it
should. Instead, the belt will likely be over the
child's abdomen.
In
a crash the belt would apply
force right on the child's abdomen, which could
cause serious or fatal injuries.
So,
be sure that
any child small enough for one is always
properly restrained
in
a child or infant restraint.
44
f
A
CAUTION:
Never hold a baby
in
your arms white riding
in
a
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much
--
until
a
crash. During a crash a baby will become
so
heavy you can’t hold
it.
For example,
in
a crash
at only
25
mph (40 km/h), a 12-pound
(5.5
kg)
baby will suddenly become
a
240-pound (110 kg)
force on your arms. The baby would be almost
impossible to hold.
(Continuec
I
I1
CAUTION: (Continued)
I
Secure the baby
in
an infant restraint.
I
L
Child
Restraints
Be
sure to follow the instructions for the restraint. You
may find these instructions
on
the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has
to
be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance
of
personal injury.
The instructions that come with the infant or child
restraint will show you how to do that.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We
at
General Motors therefore recommend that you put your
child restraint in the rear
seat
unless the child is an
infant and you’re the
only
adult in the vehicle. In that
case, you might want to secure the restraint in the front
seat where you can keep an eye on the baby.
Wherever you install it, be sure
to
secure the child
restraint properly.
i
A
CAUTION:
I
~
An unsecured child restraint can move around in
a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any chiP
restraint in your vehicle
--
even when no child
i,
Top
Strap
Vehicles first sold in Canada have child restraint anchor
bracket hardware in the glove box, along with
instructions for installing it. This should be used only
with a child restraint, and only to secure
a
child restraint
at the center rear seating position. Additional anchor
brackets for child restraints at one or both
of
the rear
outside seating positions are available at Buick
dealerships in Canada.
If
your child restraint has a top strap, it should
be
anchored.
If
you need
to
have an anchor installed, you can ask
your Buick dealer to put it in for
YOU.
If you want to
install an anchor yourself, your dealer can tell
you
how
to
do
it.
Securing
a
Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Position
You’ll be using
the
lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier
section about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
1.
Put the restraint
on
the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
47
2.
Secure the child in
the
child restraint as the
instructions say.
3.
Pull out the vehicle’s safety belt and run the lap part
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
See
if
the shoulder belt would
go
in
front of the
child’s face
or
neck. If
so,
put
it
behind the child
restraint.
4.
Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button faces
upward
or
outward,
so
you’ll be able to unbuckle it
quickly
if
you ever need to.
5.
Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of
the
retractor to
set
the lock.
?
6.
To
tighten the belt, feed the lap belt
into
the retractor
while
you
push down
on
the child restraint.
'5.
'?
See the earlier section about the top strap if the child
restraint has one.
1.
Make the belt as long as possible by tilting
the
latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2.
Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
3.
Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
4.
Run
the vehicle’s safety belt through
or
around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
5.
Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button faces
upward
or
outward,
so
you’ll
be able to unbuckle
it
quickly if you ever need to.
6.
To
tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint.
51
4.
Buckle the belt.
Make sure the release button faces upward or
outward,
so
you’ll be able to unbuckle it quickly
if
you ever need to.
5.
Pull the rest
of
the lap belt all
the
way
out
of
the
retractor to set
the
lock.
6.
To
tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the
retractor while
you
push down
on
the child restraint.
A
1
I
7.
Push and pull the child restraint in different
A
directions to be sure it is secure. Children who have outgrown child restraints should
To
remove the child restraint, just unbuckle
the
vehicle's
wear
the
safety
belts.
safety belt and let it
go
back all the way.
-
The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or larger child passenger.
If you have the choice, a child should
sit
next to
a
window
so
the
child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the
safety belts properly.
Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other
people who are.
’
crash, the
two
children can be crushed together
and seriously injured.
A
belt must be used by
only one person at a time.
55
@
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is
so
small thatthe shoulder belt is
verv close to the child’s face
or
neck?
Y
A:
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder,
so
that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide.
If
the
child is
so
small that the shoulder belt is still very
close to the child’s face or neck, you might want to
place the child in the center seat position, the one
that has only a lap belt.
1
Here a child is sitting
in
a’seat that
has
a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder
part
is behind
the child.
If
the
child wears the
belt
in this way, in
a
crash the child might slide under the belt. The
belt’s force would then
be
applied
right on the
child’s abdomen. That
could
causQ serious or
fatal
iniuries
I
56
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you
should
use
it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order
you
an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat
you
will wear,
so
the
extender will be long enough for
you.
The
extender will
be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that
you
choose. Don’t let someone
else
use
it,
and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it
to the regular safety belt.
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure all your belts, buckles, latch
plates, retractors, anchorages and reminder systems are
working properly. Look
for
any
loose
parts
or
damage.
If
you
see anything that might keep a restraint system
from doing its job, have it repaired.
Replacing Safety Belts After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will have to have safety belt
parts, like the retractor, replaced or anchorage locations
repaired
--
even
if
the belt wasn’t being used at the time
of
the collision.
57
If
your seat adjuster won’t work after
a
crash, the
special
part
of
the
safety belt that
goes
through
the
seat
to
the
adjuster may need
to
be replaced.
Q:
What’s
wrong
with this?
A:
The belt is torn.
CAUTION:
frayed belts may not protect you in a
Torn or
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If
a belt
is
torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
I
1
Part
2
Features
&
Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your Buick. and information on starting. shifting
and braking
.
Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you
if
everything is working
properly
..
and what to do if you have a problem
.
Keys
............................................................................
60
DoorLocks
.......................................................................
62
NewVehicleBreak-In
..............................................................
74
StartingtheEngine
.................................................................
76
ShiftingtheTransaxle
..............................................................
80
Windows
.........................................................................
90
TiltSteeringWheel
................................................................
90
Multi-FunctionLever
...............................................................
91
TurnandLaneChangeSignals
...................................................
91
Headlight High-Low Beam Change Signals
.........................................
91
WindshieldWiper/Washer
......................................................
94
CruiseControl
................................................................
96
Instrumentpanel
...................................................................
116
Speedometer and Odometer
.....................................................
117
Warning Lights and Gages
......................................................
117
59
~
..
.
~
..
..
_.__~
.......
-
......
...
..._-
....
-
Keys
A
CAUTION:
Leaving young children in a vehicle with the
-’
’**,>’’
ignition key
is
dangerous for many reasons.
A
child or others could be badly injured or even
killed.
They could operate power windows or other
controls
or
even make the vehicle move. Don’t
leave the keys in a vehicle with young children..
The ignition keys
are
for
the ignition only.
60
1
The door keys are for the
doors and all other locks.
When a new Park Avenue is delivered, the dealer
removes the plugs from the keys, and gives them to
the first owner. However, the ignition key may not have
a plug.
Each plug has a code on
it
that tells your dealer or a
qualified locksmith how
to
make extra keys. Keep the
plugs
in
a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be
able to have new ones made easily using these plugs.
If
your ignition keys don’t have plugs,
go
to your Buick
dealer for the correct key code
if
you need a new
ignition key.
Your Buick has a number of new features that
can help prevent theft. But you can have a lot
4
trouble getting into your vehicle
if
you ever lock
your keys inside. You may even have to damage
Door
Locks
There are several ways
to
lock and unlock your vehicle:
’
/d
CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dang
Passengers
--
especially children
-!
open the doors and fall out. When a door
i
locked, the inside handle won’t open it.
;
Outsiders can easily enter through
an
u
door when you slow down or stop your
This may not be
so
obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown out
of
the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety
belts properly, lock your doors, and you will be
far better off whenever you drive your vehicle.
From the outside:
Use
your door key.
If your vehicle has a theft deterrent system and it is
armed, unlock the doors only with the
key
or Remote
Keyless Entry System. This will avoid setting
off
the
alarm.
From the inside:
To
lock the door, move the
lock control on the
door down.
I
To
unlock the door,
move the lock control
on the door up.
Power Door Locks
Push
a power door lock
I
switch
to
lock or unlock
all
of
the doors.
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
(Option)
Just close
your
doors and turn on the ignition. Every
time you move your shift lever
out
of “P” (Park) all
of
the doors will lock. And, every time you stop and move
your shift lever into “P” (Park), your doors will unlock.
If someone needs to get out while you’re
not
in “P”
(Park), have that person use the manual or power lock.
When the door is closed again, it will not lock
automatically. Just use the manual or power lock to lock
the door again.
You can program the automatic door lock feature to
allow the doors to remain locked after you shift into “P”
(Park).
To
do this:
1.
Close your doors and
turn
the ignition
ON.
2.
Keep your foot on the brake pedal.
3.
Press and hold the driver’s power door lock switch.
4.
Move your shift lever out of
“P”
(Park), then move
the shift lever back into “P” (Park).
5.
Release the lock switch.
Your doors will now lock when you shift out
of
“P”
(Park), and remain locked until you use the manual or
power door unlock switch.
To
reprogram the door locks to lock and unlock when
you shift in and out of
“P”
(Park) do the following:
1.
Close your doors and turn the ignition
ON.
2.
Keep your foot on the brake pedal.
3.
Press and hold the driver’s power door unlock
switch.
4.
Move the shift lever out of
“P’
(Park), then move the
shift lever back into “P” (Park).
5.
Release the unlock switch.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your
door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and
close the door.
If your vehicle has
a
theft deterrent system, see
“Universal Theft Deterrent” in the Index.
Trunk
Remote Trunk Release
I
The trunk release switch in
the glove
box
must be ON
for the TRUNK button to
work. This feature allows
you
to
secure items in the
trunk.
To
secure,
turn
OFF
i
.=
TRUNK
I
the TRUNK RELEASE,
lock the glove box, then
take the door key with you.
The TRUNK button is on
the instrument panel
to
the
left of the steering column.
It
will release the trunk
lock when in Retained
Accessory Power mode or
with the ignition switch
ON
and the transaxle in PARK
If
you
have the Remote Keyless Entry System, it will
also unlock your trunk.
Automatic Pull-Down Feature (Option)
If
you
have this feature, it pulls the trunk lid closed. This
allows you to gently push the trunk lid down and the
pull-down feature then secures it completely.
/d
CAUTION:
Your car may have an automatic pull down
feature that helps close the trunk electronically.
Your fingers can be trapped under the trunk lid
as it goes down. Your fingers could be injured,
and you would need someone
to
help you free
them. Keep your fingers away from the trunk lid
as you close
it
and as it
is
going down.
NOTICE:
Do
not slam your
LI
UI
~r<
lid
QuvVn
if
you have
th
pull-down feature. If you
do,
you may damage
t
Remote Keyless Entry System
(Option)
If your Buick has this option, you can lock and unlock
your doors or unlock your trunk from up to
30
feet
(9
m)
away using the key chain transmitter supplied
with
your
vehicle.
Your Remote Keyless Entry System operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules.
This device complies with Part
15
of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2)
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Should interference to this system occur, try this:
Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See the instructions on battery
replacement.
vehicle. This product has a maximum range.
blocking the signal.
Check the distance.
You
may be too far
from
your
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
See your Buick dealer or a qualified technician for
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void autho&ation to
use this equipment.
service.
Operation
The driver’s door will unlock automatically when
UNLOCK
is pressed.
If
pressed again within
5
seconds,
all doors will unlock. All doors
will
lock when
LOCK
is
pressed. The trunk will unlock when the opened trunk
symbol is pressed, but only when the ignition is off.
Illuminated Entry System
If
your Buick also
has
this option, the keytag will make
it work. Touch any button on the keytag to light up the
door locks and the inside
of
your car. The lights will
stay on for
15
to
30
seconds.
Theft Deterrent System
If
your Buick also has this option, the keytag will arm it
whenever the doors are closed and you push the
LOCK
button. It will disarm the system when
you
push
UNLOCK.
Matching %ansmitter(s)
To
Your Vehicle
Each key chain transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter
is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through
your dealer. Remember to bring the remaining
transmitter with you when
you
go to your dealer. When
the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to
your
vehicle, the remaining transmitter must also be matched.
Once the new transmitter is coded, the lost transmitter
will not unlock your vehicle.
You
can match
a
transmitter to as many different
vehicles as you own, provided they are equipped with
exactly the same model svstem. (General Motors offers
several different models
of
these systems on their
vehicles.) Each vehicle can have only two transmitters
matched to it.
To
match a transmitter, use the following instructions.
1.
Have both transmitters that will be matched to the
car present, even if only one is new. Remove the car
keys from the ignition and have them with you.
2.
Find
the
12
pin diagnostic connector above the
accelerator pedal.
r
BLK
ASSEMBLY LINE DIAGNOSTIC
LINK (ALDL) CONNECTOR
1
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Use a jumper wire with alligator clips at both ends to
ground (Terminal
A)
to program (Terminal
G).
Grounding the program terminal
erases
the system
memory and causes the doors to lock and unlock
once. This means the system is ready to be matched
to the transmitter.
Keeping the program terminal grounded, press the
UNLOCK button on the first transmitter. The door
locks will lock and unlock again to indicate the
transmitter is now matched. If there is no response,
check the transmitter batteries. If you do not want to
match a second transmitter, proceed to Step
6.
Still keeping the program terminal grounded, repeat
Step
4
with the second transmitter.
If
you
disconnect
the ground wire before completing this step, or if
you press the button
on
the first transmitter more
than once, only the first transmitter is matched. If
you make a mistake, disconnect the jumper wire and
start over at Step
3.
Remove the jumper wire. (Note: The system will not
operate if the jumper wire is still connected.)
Test the operation of both transmitters with the
vehicle.
If
the lock control does not work as it should,
see
your
Buick dealer.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the batteries in your key chain
transmitter should last about two years.
You
can tell the batteries are weak if the transmitter
won’t work at the normal range in any location.
If
you
have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter
works, it’s probably time to change the wlerieg,
For battery replacement,
use
two Duracells
batteries, type DL-2016, or
a similar type.
To replace the batteries:
Rear
Door
Security Lock
f
2.
Lift
off
the front cover, bottom half first.
3.
Remove and replace the batteries. Put them in as the
instructions under the batteries indicate.
Your Buick is equipped with rear door security locks
that help prevent passengers from opening the rear doors
of
your car from the inside.
To
,use one
of
these locks:
,.
.
..
1.
Move the lever
on
the door all the
ENGAGED
position.
SECURITY
way up to the
REAR
DOORS
2.
Close the door.
4.
Replace the front cover. Make sure the cover is on
3.
Do
the same thing to the other rear door lock.
tightly,
so
water won’t get in. Replace the screw in
the back cover. The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from
inside when this feature is in use.
If
you want to open a
rear door when the security lock is on:
69
1.
Unlock the door from the inside.
2.
Then open the door from the outside.
If you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adults or
older children who ride in the rear won’t be able to open
the rear door from the inside.
You
should let adults and
older children know how these security locks work, and
how to cancel the locks.
To
cancel the rear door lock:
1.
Unlock the door from the inside and open the door
from the outside.
CHILD
SECURITY
LOCK
SET
LEVER
ON
BOTH
1
REAR
DOORS
1
1
2.
Move the lever all
the way down.
Illuminated Entry System (Option)
3. Do
the same for the other rear
(
loor.
You’ll be able to see where to put the door key when it’s
dark, and
the
lights inside your Buick will go
on.
They’ll go off when you start your engine, or when
25
seconds have passed.
If
you
have the Remote Keyless
Entry System option, it can make the illuminated entry
system work too. (See Remote Keyless Entry System in
the Index.)
If you have this option, your interior lights will
automatically shut
off
after a
10
minute period if a door
is
left
ajar. This feature
is
designed
to
help eliminate
battery wear down.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
70
Theft
Vehicle theft is big business, especially
in
some cities.
Although your Buick has a number of theft deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on
it
can make it
impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can
help.
Kev in the ignition:
If you walk away from your
vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an easy target for joy
riders or professional thieves
--
so
don’t do
it.
When
you
park your Buick and open the driver’s door,
you’ll
hear a tone reminding you
to
remove your key
from
the
ignition and take it with you. Always do this.
Your steering wheel will be locked, and
so
will your
ignition and transaxle. And remember to lock the doors.
Parking at Night: Park in a lighted spot, close all
windows and lock your vehicle. Remember
to
keep your
valuables
out
of
sight. Put them
in
a storage area, or take
them with you.
Parking. Lots: If you park
in
a lot where someone will
be watching your vehicle, it’s best to lock
it
up and take
your keys. But what if you have
to
leave your ignition
key? What if you have to leave something valuable
in
your vehicle?
Put your valuables in
a
storage area, like your trunk
Lock the glove box.
or glove box.
0
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
0
Then take the door key with you.
Universal Theft Deterrent (Option)
If your Buick has this option, it has a theft deterrent
alarm system. With this system, the “SECURITY’’ light
will flash as
you
open the door (if your ignition is off).
This light reminds you
to
arm the theft deterrent system.
Here’s how to do it:
1.
Open the
door.
2.
Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
Remote Keyless Entry System. The “SECURITY”
light should come on
and
stay
on.
3.
Close all doors. The “SECURITY” light should go
off.
If a door or the trunk is opened without the key or
Remote Keyless Entry System, the alarm will
go
off. It
will also
go
off if a door lock or
the
trunk lock is
damaged. Your vehicle’s lights will flash and the horn
71
will sound for several minutes, then will
go
off
to save
battery power.
Remember, the theft deterrent system won’t arm if you
lock
the
doors with a key or manual door lock. It arms
only if you use
a
power door lock switch or Remote
Keyless Entry System. You should also remember that
you
can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key
if the alarm has been set
off.
You must still shut off the
alarm by inserting the key’in the door lock.
Here’s how to avoid setting
off
the alarm by accident:
0
0
If you don’t want to arm the theft deterrent system,
the vehicle should be locked after the doors are
closed.
Always unlock a door with’a key, or use the Remote
Keyless Entry System. Unlocking a door any other
way will set
off
the alarm.
If
you
set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door
with your
key.
You can also turn off the alarm by using the Remote
Keyless Entry System,
if
you have it. The alarm won’t
stop
if
you try to unlock a door any other way.
How
to Test The
Alarm
The alarm
can
be tested by first having the driver’s
window down. Arm
the
system by locking the doors
with the power door lock switch or the Remote Keyless
Entry System. Get out
of
the
car and close the door, wait
for the security light to go out, then reach in through the
window, unlock the door with the manual door lock,
then open the door. This should set the alarm off.
If the alarm does not sound when
it
should, check to see
if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown. To
replace the fuse, see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the
Index.
72
PASS-Key
I1
TM
Your vehicle
is
equipped with the PASS-Key
I1
TM
(Personalized Automotive Security System) theft
deterrent system. PASS-Key
I1
TM
is a passive theft
deterrent system. This means you don’t have to do
anything different to arm or disarm the system. It works
when you insert or remove the key from the ignition.
PASS-Key
TM
uses a resistor pellet in the ignition key
that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
When the PASS-Key I1 system senses that someone
using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s starter
and
fuel
systems. For about three minutes, the starter
won’t work and fuel won’t go to the engine. If someonl
tries to start your vehicle again or uses another key
during this time, the vehicle will not start. This
discourages someone from randomly trying different
is
e
keys with different resistor pellets in an attempt to make
a match.
The ignition
key
must be clean and dry before it’s
inserted in the ignition or the engine may not start. If the
engine does not start and the “SECURITY” light comes
on, the key may be dirty or wet. Turn the ignition
off.
Clean and dry the key. Wait about three minutes and try
again. The security light will remain on during this time.
If the starter still won’t work, and the key appears to be
clean and dry, wait about three minutes and try the other
ignition key.
At
this time, you may also want
to
check
the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index).
If the starter won’t work with the other key, your vehicle
needs service. If your vehicle does start, the first ignition
key may
be
faulty. See your Buick dealer or a locksmith
who can service the PASS-Key I1
TM
.
If
you accidentally
use
a key that has a damaged or
missing resistor pellet, the starter won’t work and the
Ignition
Key
Positions
Your square-headed key
operates your ignition lock.
ACC
1
I
This lock gives you five different positions.
Before
you
put the
key
in, your ignition will be
in
the
“Lock” position. This position locks your ignition,
steering wheel and transaxle. It’s a
theft
deterrent
feature.
The
other positions
let
you perform these functions:
ACC:
Accessory lets you use things like
the
radio and
the
windshield wipers when the engine is off.
To
get into
“Acc”, push in the key and turn it toward
you.
Your
steering wheel will remain locked, just as it was before
you inserted the key.
OFF:
This position lets you turn off the engine but still
turn the steering wheel.
It
doesn’t lock the steering
wheel like “Lock.” Use “Off’ if
you
must have your car
in motion while the engine is off (for example, if your
car is being pushed).
RUN:
This
is
the position for driving.
START
This position starts your engine.
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck
in
“Lock” and you can’t
turn
it,
be sure
it
is all the way
in.
If
it
is, then turn
the
steering wheel left and right while you
turn
the key hard. But
turn
the key only with your
hand. Using a tool to force
it
could break the key
or
the ignition switch. If none of this works, then
your vehicle needs service.
p’
Retained Accessory Power (Option)
After the ignition is turned off, and before any door is
opened, the following systems will work for ten
minutes:
0
Fuel Filler Door Release
Trunk Release
0
Power Windows
Radio
0
Brake Transaxle Shift Interlock
0
Optional Astroroof
Starting Your Engine
Engines start differently. The 8th digit of your Vehicle
Identification Number
(VIN)
shows the code letter or
number for your engine. You will find the
VIN
at the top
left of your instrument panel. (See “Vehicle
Identification Number” in the Index.) Follow the proper
steps to start the engine.
Move your shift lever to
“P”
(Park) or “N” (Neutral).
Your engine won’t start in any other position
--
that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use
“N” (Neutral) only.
Don’t try to shift to “P” (Park) if your Buic
moving.
If
you do, you
could
damage the
:
transaxle. Shift to “P” (Park) only when
y
To start your
3.8
Liter (Code L) engine:
1.
Don’t push the accelerator pedal before starting your
engine. In some other vehicles
you
might need
to
do
this, but because of your vehicle’s computer systems,
you don’t.
starts,
let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down
as your engine gets warm.
2.
Turn your ignition key to “Start.” When the engine
3.
If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in “Start”
for about three seconds at a time until your engine
starts. Wait about
15
seconds between each try to
help avoid draining your battery.
4.
If your engine still won’t start (or starts but
then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
“Start” for about three seconds. If the car starts
briefly but then stops again,
do
the same thing, but
this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. After
waiting about
15
seconds, repeat the normal starting
procedure.
77
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle.
If
you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way
If
you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see
the part
of
this Manual that tells how to do it
without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing
Your Car” in the Index.
To start your SupercharEed
V6
3.8
Liter (Code
1)
engine:
1.
2.
Don’t push the accelerator pedal before starting your
engine. In some other vehicles you might need to do
this, but because
of
your vehicle’s computer systems,
you don’t.
Turn your ignition key to “Start.” When the engine
starts, let go
of
the
key. The idle speed will go down
as your engine gets warm.
3.
If
it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in “Start”
for about three to five seconds at a time until your
engine starts. Wait about
15
seconds between each
try to help avoid draining your battery.
4.
If
your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops),
it
could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding
it
there as you hold the key in
“Start” for about three seconds. If the car starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but
this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. After
waiting about
15
seconds, repeat the normal starting
procedure.
78
Driving Through Deep Standing
Water
standing water, water can come in through your
engine's air intake and badly damage your
engine.
If
you can't avoid deep puddles or
standing water, drive through them very
s
Engine
Block
Heater (Canada Only)
In
very cold weather,
0
"
F
(-
18
"C)
or colder, the engine
block heater can help. You'll get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
To
use the block heater:
1.
Turn off the engine.
2.
Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
3.
Plug
it
into
a
normal, grounded 110-volt outlet.
A
CAUTION:
I
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock.
Also,
the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use
a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least
15
amps.
I
I
NOTICE:
After you’ve used the block heater, be sure to
store the cord as
it
was before, to keep
it
away
from moving engine parts. If you
don’t,
it
could
be damaged.
1
I
How long should you keep the block heater plugged in?
The answer depends on the weather, the kind
of
oil you
have, and some other things. Instead
of
trying to list
everything here, we ask that
you
contact a Buick dealer
in the area where you’ll be parking your vehicle. The
dealer
can
give
you
the best advice for that particular
area.
Automatic Transaxle
160
-
IULJ
PARK
FINO321
i
b
PARK
R
N
0
D
2
1
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
P
(Park)
This locks your front wheels. It’s the best position to
use when you start your engine because your vehicle
can’t move easily.
I
80
I
A
CAUTION:
It
is
dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully
in
“P” (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to.
If
you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, when you’re on fairly level
ground, always set your parking brake and move
the shift lever to “P” (Park).
See “Shifting Into “P” (Park)”
in
the Index.
If
you
are parking on a
hill,
or
if
you’re pulling a trailer
also see“Parking on Hills” or “Towing a Trailer’
in
the Index.
Ensure the shift lever
is
fully
in “P” (Park) range before
starting the engine. Your Buick has a brake-transaxle
shift interlock. You have
to
fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from “P” (Park) when the
ignition key is in the “Run” position. If you cannot shift
out of
“P”
(Park), ease pressure
on
the shift lever
-
push
the shift lever all the way into
“P”
(Park) as you
maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever
into the gear you wish. See “Shifting Out
of
‘P’ (Park)”
in this part.
0
R
(Reverse)
Use this gear to back up.
Shifting
to
‘W’
(Reverse) while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your transaxle.
Shift to
“R”
only after your vehicle is stoppc
To rock your vehicle back and forth
to
get
out
of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see
“If
You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or
Snow”
in
the
Index.
N
(Neutral)
In this position, your engine doesn’t connect with the
wheels.
To
restart when you’re already moving,
use
“N”
(Neutral) only. Also, use
“N”
when your vehicle
is being towed.
I
A
CAUTION:
Shifting out of “PYy (Park) or “N” (Neutral) while
’
your engine is “racing” (running at high speed)
is dangerous. Unless your foot
is
firmly on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or
objects. Don’t shift out of “P” (Park) or “N”
I
(Neutral) while your engine is racing.
Damage
to
your tia,lsaxI
Going about
35
mph
(56
km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down
to
the next gear and have more
power.
0
D
or
3
(Third Gear)
This is like
@,
but you never go into Overdrive.
Here are some times you might choose
“D
or
3”
instead of
@:
-
When driving on hilly, winding roads
-
When towing
a
trailer,
so
there is less shifting
between gears
-
When going down a steep hill
0
2
(Second Gear)
This position gives you more power but lower fuel
economy. You can use
“2”
on
hills.
It
can help
control your speed as
you
go down steep mountain
roads, but then you would also want to use your
brakes off and on.
0
@
Automatic Overdrive
This position is for normal driving. If you need more
power for passing, and you’re:
-
Going less than about
35
mph
(56
km/h), push
your accelerator pedal about halfway down.
82
NOTICE:
,
*
_.
s*,
?x-&.
Don’t drive
in
“2”
(Second Gear) for more than
5
miles
(8
km), or at speeds over
55
mph
(88
-
km/h),
or you can damage your transaxle. Use
“@”
01
“D”
“3”
as much as possible
Don’t shift
into
“2”
unless you are going slower
than
65
mph
(105
km/h),
or
you can damage your
1
(First
Gear)
This position gives you even more power (but lower
fuel
economy) than
“2.”
You
can
use
it
on
very steep
hills, or in deep snow
or
mud. If the selector lever is
put in
“1,”
the
transaxle won’t shift into first gear
until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
NOTICE:
If your front wheels can’t rotate, don’t try
to
drive. This might happen if you were stuck
in
very deep sand or mud or were
up
against a solid
object.
You
could damage your transaxle.
Also,
if you stop when going
uphill,
don’t hoW
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This could overheat and damage
th
transaxle. Use your brakes
or shift
intc
‘‘D
to hold your vehicle
in
position on a
Automatic
Ride
Control
Your Park Avenue Automatic Ride Control provides a
comfortable controlled ride. This suspension system
keeps adjusting your car’s ride and handling depending
upon speed and road conditions. Automatic Ride
Control uses three levels
of
control
to
ensure a
combination
of
balance and stability.
83
Parking Brake
The parking brake uses the brakes on the rear wheels.
To
set the parking brake:
Hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot.
Push down the parking brake pedal with your
left
foot.
If the ignition
is
on, the brake system warning light will
come on.
To
release the parking brake:
Hold the regular brake pedal down.
Pull
the brake
release lever.
If
you try to drive off with the parking braKe on, the
brake light stays on and a chime sounds until
you
release
the parking brake or recycle the ignition.
Driving with the parking brake
on
can cause youkz.,--.I
rear brakes to overheat.
You
may have to replace-
them, and you could also damage other parts of
If
YOU
are
on
a hill: See “Parking
on
Hills”
in
the Index.
That section shows how to turn your front wheels.
If
you are towing a trailer and are parking
on
any hill:
See “Towing a Trailer”
in
the Index. That section shows
what
to
do first to keep the trailer from moving.
Shifting Into
“P”
(Park)
A
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if
the shift lever is not fully
in
“P” (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If
you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move,
when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow.
If
you are parking on a hill, or
if
you’re pulling a trailer, also see “Parking On
H”‘
;”
or “Towing a Trailer”
in
the Index.
1.
Hold
the
brake pedal down with your right foot and
set
the
parking brake.
2.
Move the shift lever
into
“P”
(Park) position like
this:
Pull the lever
toward
you.
L.
P.
.=
Move the lever up
as
far
as
it
will
go.
7.:-
.*
I
.
P
3.
Move
the
ignition key to “Lock.”
4.
Remove the key and take
it
with
you.
If
you can
walk away from your vehicle
with
the ignition key
in
your hand, your vehicle is
in
“P”
(Park).
Leaving
Your
Vehicle With the Engine
Running
I
A
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly
if
the shift lever is not fully in
“P”
(Park) with the parking brake firmly set. And, if
you leave the vehicle with the engine running,
it
could overheat and even catch fire. You or other3
could be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with
the engine running unless you have to.
If
you
have
to
leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in “P” (Park) and your
parking brake is firmly
set
before you leave
it.
After
you’ve moved the shift lever
into
the “P” (Park)
position, hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if
you
can move the shift lever away from “P” (Park)
without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it means
that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into “P” (Park).
Shifting Out of
46
P
$9
(Park)
Your Buick has a brake-transaxle shift interlock. You
have
to
fully apply your regular brake before
you
can
shift from “P” (Park) when the ignition is in the “Run”
position. See “Automatic Transaxle” in the Index.
If you cannot shift out of
“P”
(Park), ease pressure on
the shift lever
--
push the shift lever all the way into
“P’
(Park) as you maintain brake application. Then move the
shift lever into the gear
you
wish. If you ever hold the
brake pedal down but still can’t shift out of “P” (Park),
try this:
I.
Turn the key to “Off.” Open and close the driver’s
door to turn off the Retained Accessory Power
feature,
if
you have
it.
2.
Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step
4.
3.
Shift to
“N”
(Neutral).
4.
Start the vehicle and then shift
to
the drive gear you
want.
5.
Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
87
Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust
A
CAUTION:
I
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don't park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things
that can burn.
A
CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill.
It
contains the gas
carbon monoxide
(CO),
which you can't see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming
in
if:
0
Your exhaust system sounds strange or
0
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
0
Your vehicle was damaged
in
a collision.
0
Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
different.
Repairs weren't done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
If
you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
Drive
it
only with
all
the windows down to
blow out any
CO;
and
0
Have
it
fixed immediately.
modified improperly.
Running Your Engine While You’re
Parked
It’s better not
to
park with the engine running. But if
you
ever have
to,
here are some things
to
know.
b!,
CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the air system control
off
could allow dangerous exhaust
into
your vehicle
(see
the earlier Caution under “Engine Exhaust”).
Also,
idling in a closeddn place can let deadly
carbon monoxide
(CO)
into your vehicle even if
the fan switch
is
at the highest setting. One place
this
can happen is a garage. Exhaust
--
with
CO
--
can come
in
easily.
NEVER
park
in
a garage with
the engine running.
-
Another
closed-in
place
can
be
a
blizzard.
(See
“Blizzard”
in
the Index.)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
It
can
be
dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the
shift
lever is not fully
in
“Pyy
(Park) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running
unless you have to.
If
you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You
or
others could be injured.
To
be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to
“P”
(Park).
Follow the proper steps to
be
sure
your
vehicle
won’t move.
See
“Shifting
Into
’P‘
(Park)”
in
the
Index.
If
you are parking
on
a
hill,
or if you’re pulling a
trailer, also see “Parking
on
Hills”
or
“Towing a
Trailer”
in
the Index.
Power Windows
I
Your power window controls are on the armrest. The
switch for the driver’s window has an express-down
feature. Pull the switch back all
the
way, release it and
the window will lower automatically.
To
stop the
window from lowering, push the switch forward.
To
partially open the window, pull
the
switch back and
quickly release it.
You may
also
have a lock out button. Push
LOCK
to
disable the power window switches. This
will
prevent
passengers
from
opening and closing the windows. The
driver can still control all the windows
with
the switch
in
the
locked position. Push
UNLOCK
to allow your
passengers to be able to use their window switches
again.
Horn
To sound the horn, press a pad with
the
horn symbol on
either side
of
the steering wheel.
Tilt
Wheel
i
I
A
tilt steering wheel
allows you to adjust the
steering wheel before
you
drive.
You
can also raise
it
to the highest level to give your
legs more room when
you
exit
and enter the vehicle.
To
tilt
the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Move the steering wheel to
a
comfortable level,
then release the lever to lock
the
wheel in place.
The Turn Signal/Headlight Beam
Lever
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
H
The lever on
the
left side
of
the steering column
includes your:
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
Headlight High-Low Beam
&
Passing Signal
0
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control
C!
The turn signal has two upward (for Right) and two
downward (for Left) positions. These positions allow
you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way
up
or down.
When the turn
is
finished, the lever will return
automatically.
A
green arrow on the
instrument panel
will
flash
in
the direction
of
the
turn
or lane change.
To
signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until
the
green arrow starts to flash. Hold it there
until
you
complete your lane change. The lever
will
return by
itself when you release it.
As
you
signal a turn or a lane change,
if
the arrows don’t
flash but just stay on, a signal bulb may be burned out
and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If
the
green arrows don’t go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuse (see “Fuses”
in
the Index)
and for burned-out bulbs.
If
you
have
a
trailer towing option with added wiring for
the trailer lights, a different turn signal flasher is used.
With this flasher installed, the signal indicator will flash
even
if
a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check
the
front
and rear turn signal lights regularly to make sure they
are working.
Operation
of
Lights
Although your vehicle’s lighting system (headlights,
parking lights, fog lamps, side marker lights and
taillights) meet all applicable federal lighting
requirements, certain states and provinces may apply
their own lighting regulations that may require special
attention before
you
operate these lights. For example,
some jurisdictions may require that you operate your
lower beam lights with fog lamps at all times, or that
headlights be turned on whenever you must use your
windshield wipers. In addition, most jurisdictions
prohibit driving solely with parking lights, especially at
dawn or dusk. It is recommended that
you
check with
you own state or provincial highway authority for
applicable lighting regulations.
Headlight High-Low
Beam
To
change the headlights
from low beam to high or
high to low, pull the turn
signal lever. all the way
toward you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this blue light on the
instrument panel also will
be on.
R
1J
H
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
marked
“WIPER.”
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
“MIST.”
Hold it there until the wipers start, then let
go.
The
wipers will stop after one cycle. If you want more
cycles, hold the band on “MIST” longer.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or
snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The
closer to
“LO,”
the shorter the delay.
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away
from you to the
“LO”
position. For high speed wiping,
turn the band further, to “HI.”
To
stop the wipers, move
the band to
“OFF.”
A
CAUTION:
Damaged wiper blades may prevent you from
seeing well enough to drive safely.
To
avoid
damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the
wiper blades before using them.
If
they’re frozen
to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them.
If
your blades do become damaged, get new
blades or blade inserts.
93
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers.
A
circuit
breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away
snow or
ice
to prevent
an
overload.
Windshield Washer
At the top
of
the multifunction lever there’s a paddle
with the word
“PUSH”
on it. To spray washer fluid
on
the windshield, push the paddle for less than a second.
The washer will spray several times, then stop. Unless
they are already turned on, the wipers will operate at
low speed for several sweeps, then turn
off.
To
get more fluid on the windshield, push and hold the
paddle. Spraying will continue as long as
the
paddle is
held.
If
this light comes on,
it
means you’re low on
washer fluid.
’
!
WASHER
FLUID
LOW
94
I
I
A
CAUTION:
a
Driving without washer fluid can be
dangerous.
A
bad mud splash can block
your vision. You could hit another vehicle
or go off the road. Check your washer fluid
level often.
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise
the washer fluid can form ice
on
the
windshield, blocking your vision.
Cruise Control
L
..
.
.
With Cruise Control,
you
can maintain a speed
of
about
25
mph
(40
km/h) or more without keeping your
foot
on
the accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise
Control does not work at speeds below about
25
mph
(40
km/h).
When you apply your brakes, the Cruise Control shuts
off.
A
CAUTION:
Cruise Control can be dangerous where
you can't drive safely
at
a steady speed.
So,
don't use your Cruise Control
on
winding roads or
in
heavy traffic.
Cruise Control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes
in
tire traction can cause needless
wheel spinning, and you could lose
control. Don't use Cruise Control on
slippery roads.
To
Set
Cruise
Control
I
A
CAUTION:
If
you leave your Cruise Control switch on when
you’re not using Cruise, you might hit
a
button
and
go
into Cruise when you don’t want to.
You
could be startled and even lose control. Keep the
Cruise Control switch
“OFF”
until you want to
use it.
2.
Get
up
to the speed
you
want.
4.
Take your foot
off
the accelerator pedal.
71
To
Resume
a
Set Speed
Suppose
you
set your Cruise Control
at
a
desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off
the Cruise Control. But
you
don’t need to reset it. Once
you’re going about
25
mph
(40
km/h) or more, you can
move the Cruise Control switch from
“ON”
to
“R/A”
(Resume/Accelerate) for about
half
a
second.
F.
I
I
I
A
CAUTION:
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay
there.
If
you hold the
switch
at ‘‘Resume/AcceIerate”
longer than half a second, the vehicle
will
keep
going faster until you release the switch
or
apply
the brake. You could
be
startled and even
lose
control.
So
unless you want to
go
faster, don’t
hold
the
switch at “Resume/Accelerate.”
To
Increase Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to
go
to a higher speed. Here’s the
first:
1.
Use the accelerator pedal
to
get to the higher speed.
Here’s
the
second
way
to
go
to
a
higher
s.peed:
1.
Move
the
Cruise
switch from
“ON”
to “Resume/
Accelerate,” Hold
it there until
you
get
up
to
the
speed
you
want,
and
then
release the switch.
a second and then release it. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will go about
1
mph
(1.6
km/h) faster.
The accelerate feature will only work after
you
have set
the Cruise Control speed by pushing the “SET/COAST”
button.
To
Reduce Speed
While
Using
Cruise
Control
There are two ways
to
reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
2.
To
increase your speed in very small amounts, move
the switch
to
“Resume/Accelerate” for less than half
1.
Push in the button at the
end of the lever
until
you reach the lower
speed you want, then
release it.
2.
To
slow down in very small amounts, push the
button for less than half a second. Each time you do
this, you’ll
go
1 mph
(1.6
km/h) slower.
rassmg Anomer Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
To
Get Out
of
Cruise Control
There are two ways
to
turn off the Cruise Control:
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot
off
the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the Cruise Control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on
Hills
How well your Cruise Control will work
on
hills
depends upon your speed, load, and the steepness
of
the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When
going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a
lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying
the
brake takes you out
of
Cruise Control.
Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don't
use Cruise Control on steep hills.
1.
Step lightly
on
the
brake pedal
;
OR
L
2.
Move the Cruise
switch to
"OFF."
(The
"CRUISE"
light will
go
out.)
I
I
To
Erase Speed Memory
When you turn
off
the Cruise Control or the ignition, or
shift into
“P”
(Park), your Cruise Control ,set speed
memory is erased.
Lights
This switch controls these
light systems:
0
Headlights
0
Taillights
0
Parking Lights
0
License Lights
0
Sidemarker Lights
0
Instrument Panel Lights
Press the LIGHTS switch’to turn the headlights on.
Press it again to turn them
off.
Press the PARK switch to turn the parking lights on.
Press it again
to
turn them
off.
(If
the parking lights
were turned on with the PARK switch, they must be
turned
off
with that switch).
Lights CCOn” Warning
If the parking light or headlight switch
is
left on you’ll
hear
a
warning tone when
you
turn the ignition
off
and.
open the driver’s door.
Panel Lights
Instrument panel light
brightness can be adjusted
by moving this lever
between LO and HI.
Interior courtesy lights can
be turned on by sliding the
.lever all the way to the
right.
101
Twilight Sentinel (Option)
Twilight Sentinel turns your
lights on and off by sensing
how dark it is outside.
To
operate it, leave the light switch off and move the
Twilight Sentinel control to any position but
MIN.
If you move the control all the way to
MAX,
your lights
will remain on for three minutes after you turn off your
engine.
If
you move the control almost all the way in the
other direction,
so
it’s just on, the lights will go
off
quickly when
you
turn off your engine.
You
can change
this delay time from
only
a few seconds
to
three
minutes.
Please don’t cover the light sensor.
If
you cover the
sensor, it will read “dark” and your lights will come on.
It is
on
top
of
the instrument panel, on the driver’s side
defroster outlets.
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)
The Canadian Federal Government has decided that
“Daytime Running Lights” (DRL) are a useful feature,
in that DRL can make your vehicle more visible to
pedestrians and other drivers during daylight hours.
DRL are required on new vehicles sold in Canada.
Your
DRL
work with a light sensor on top
of
the
instrument panel. Don’t cover it up.
The low beam headlights will come on at reduced
brightness in daylight when:
0
The ignition
is
on
0
The headlight switch is off, and
0
The transaxle is not in “P” (Park).
At dusk, if the Twilight Sentinel feature is turned on, the
exterior lights will come
on
automatically and the low
beams will change to
full
brightness. At dawn, the
exterior lights will go out and the low beams will
change to the reduced brightness
of
DRL (if the
headlight switch is off).
Of course, you may still turn on the headlights any time
you need to.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, shift the
transaxle into
“P”
(Park). The DRL will stay
off
until
you
shift out of “P” (Park).
To turn
off
all exterior lighting at night when
you
are
parked, move
the
twilight sentinel control from
ON
to
OFF,
if it was on from the start. Or, move the control
from OFF to
ON,
then back to
OFF,
if it was off from
the start. The lights will come back
on
when you move
the transaxle out
of
PARK.
Front Seat Reading Lights
Front seat reading lights are turned
on
by
pressing the
LAMP
switch.
>-
I
I
Rear Seat Reading Lights
You
may also have reading lights
in
the rear seat.
104
Lamp Monitors (Option)
I
Bulbs
Monitored
This system will let you know when certain exterior light
bulbs fail to light. When you first start your car all eight
lights come on briefly
to
show that the system is
working.
When a bulb fails an indicator will flash for several
seconds and then stay on until the failed bulb is replaced
and lit. For example, if a burned
out
back-up light bulb
is
replaced, the indicator for back-up lamps will stay on
until the transaxle is put in reverse with the ignition on.
The bulbs are monitored only while they are being used.
If
you have recently had a low battery condition or the
battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the
indicators will flash when you turn the ignition switch to
RUN. Turning the parking lamps on will return the lamp
monitor system to normal operation.
Indicator
High Beam
Low Beam
Left Turn
Right Turn
Tail
Parking
stop
Backup
Bulbs
Monitored
Both Headlight
High Beams
Both Headlight
Low Beams
1
Front Left Turn
2
Rear Left Turn
1
Front Right Turn
2
Rear Right Turn
4
Tail
Right and Left Rear
Side Marker
2
License
4
Front Park
Right and Left Front
Side Marker
4
Rear
1
Center High Mounted
2
Back up
Mirrors
Inside
Mirror
Manual
When
you
are sitting in a comfortable driving position,
adjust the mirror
so
you
can see clearly behind your car.
The day-night adjustment allows you to adjust
the
mirror to avoid glare from the lights behind you.
PI\,
Polr
--!
1
I
7'-
DAY-NIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
Automatic
Your Buick may have the automatic inside mirror.
The automatic mirror adjusts for the glare of headlights
behind you. It detects changes in light, and then adjusts
for day or night operation.
During the day the mirror reflects all the light from
behind your car. At night, when the glare
is
too high,
it
changes to the night mode. Then,
it
reflects only part
of
the light from behind you. When the mirror changes to
the night mode,
it
holds that position
until
glare is no
longer present.
Settings
MIN:
The minimum setting is suggested when driving
where glare conditions change often. “Min” works well
for city driving at night.
MAX:
Maximum sensitivity is a good setting for
highway driving in light traffic. The mirror starts to
darken in any glare, such as headlights a long way
behind your
car.
OFF:
The mirror will stay in the day mode.
Time Delay
The mirror delays before switching from the night back
to the day position. This delay prevents rapid changing
of the mirror as you drive under lights and through
traffic.
Cleaning Photocells
Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean the two
photocells that make the mirror work.
Reverse Gear Day Mode
The reverse mode is another important feature of the
automatic mirror. .When the shift lever is placed in
“R”
(Reverse), the mirror shifts to the day mode. This gives
you a bright image in the mirror as you back up.
107
Outside Mirrors
Your Buick has the electric mirror control located
on
the
driver’s door.
Move the switch in the middle
of
the control to choose
the right or left mirror.
To
adjust the mirror, push the
arrow control
in
the direction you want the mirror to go.
Adjust each mirror
so
you can just see the side
of
your
car and the area behind your vehicle.
Heated Outside Rearview Mirror (Option)
If
you
have this option, the left outside mirror is heated
when you activate the rear window defogger.
Convex
.Outside
Mirror
Your right side mirror
is
convex.
A convex mirror’s surface is curved
so
you can see more
from the driver’s seat.
1
A
CAUTION:
I
~
If you aren’t used to a convex mirror, you can hit
another vehicle.
A
convex mirror can make
things (like other vehicles) look farther away than
they really.are. If you cut
too
sharply into the
right lane, you could hit a vehicle on your right.
Check your inside mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
108
Convenience Net (Option)
..
/.
Astroroof (Option)
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. You’ll see
it
just inside
the
back wall of the trunk.
Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can
help keep them from falling over during sharp turns or
quick starts and stops.
The
net
isn’t for larger, heavier loads. Store them
in
the
trunk as far forward as you can.
You
can unhook
the
net
so
that it will lie flat when
you’re not using
it.
-l
If you have
the
Astroroof
option, the switch is on the
-
roof between the sun visors.
It
will open the astroroof
when in Retained
Accessory Power or when
the ignition is
ON.
To
fully
open the glass panel and sunshade, press the
switch rearward and release. To stop the panel in
a
partially open position, press the switch again at the
desired point.
To
continue to open
fully,
press the switch
rearward again and release. The sunshade can be opened
manually.
To
close the glass panel, press and hold the switch
forward. The sunshade must be manually closed.
Once
the
astroroof is closed,
it
can be opened to a vent
position. Press the switch forward to vent.
To
close,
press
the
switch rearward.
Garage Door Opener Storage
The garage door opener storage area is located in the
headliner.
To
be able to use your garage door opener in
the storage area
you
will have to find a pin and hole
combination for your garage door opener, see the
following chart.
If
your garage door opener is not on the
chart you still may be able to find a pin and hole
combination that will work. Once you have found a pin
and hole combination, follow these instructions:
Pin Length
Model
Chamberlain
50
53
54LM
EZ-Lift
1089
3089
Genie
AT-35A
AT-85/AT-95
AT-90
MAT 85190
Moore-0-Matic
DT
DT2
Ladybug (MIN)
Sears
652030
53706/53707
5370815371 8
53738
Stanley
1047
1050
1052
1075
1077
1079
Tru-Guard
50TV
54Tv
Not Combatible
Hole
Location
1
.X
X
X
X
-
2
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
3
X
X
X
X
-
-
4
-
X
X
X
-
1.
To
place your garage
door opener in the
storage area, carefully
open the cover with a
c
screwdriver, as shown,
by inserting the
screwdriver and prykg
the cover down.
2.
Next, carefully pry
the panel tabs out of
the
slots
in
the
cover to
disassemble the
3.
Now install the selected
pin into the specified
hole, as indicated from
the chart.
panel and lever.
4.
Remove
the
backing from the adhesive strips and
place the panel over your garage
door
opener
so
that
the button
is
over the number from the chart.
..
-c
I
5.
If
the adhesive strips
won’t hold your opener
in place, tie down loops
may be used.
6.
Place lever
in
cover
so
that pivots are
positioned as shown.
7.
Snap the panel with your garage door opener into
the cover.
If
your garage door opener doesn’t work after
it
is
installed, another pin and
hole
combination will havetto
be tried. If the opener doesn’t shut off after the lever
is
released,
the
pin will have to be filed down.
Electronic
Level
Control
This feature keeps the rear of your car level as the load
changes. It is automatic
-
you
don’t need
to
adjust
anything.
Storage Armrest Courtesy Lights
When any door is opened, several lights go on. They
make it easy for you to enter and leave the car.
You
also
can turn these lights on by sliding the panel lights lever
to
INT
(interior).
If
a
door is left ajar for
10
minutes, the interior lights
will automatically shut off.
Assist Handles
A
folding handle over each rear door and the front
passenger's door can be used in getting in or out of your
Buick.
The armrest between the front seats opens into a storage
area. To open it, press the lever at the front edge. Inside
are cupholders which can be rotated forward for use
with the cover closed. There is also a removeable
coinholder, cassette tape and compact disc storage area.
113
~
Dual Sun Visors
Each sunvisor has two parts,
so
that both the windshield
and door glass can be shaded at the same time.
Visor Vanity Mirror (Option)
This mirror is on the larger
of
the passenger’s
sun
visors.
It
may also be on the larger of
the
driver’s sun
visors. When you open it
by
moving this latch, the lights
turn on.
The brightness of
the
lights can be adjusted
by
sliding
this switch. The Park Avenue Ultra also has visor vanity
mirrors for the rear seat passengers.
0
Rear
License
Plate Holder
To
use it, open
the
trunk lid and slide your license plate
into the slot. Always
close
the trunk to prevent theft
of
the plate.
Ashtrays
The front center ashtray may be removed for cleaning.
..
-
CI-
.
..
The rear ashtrays may also be removed for cleaning
--
n't put papers or other flammable things into
ur ashtrays.
Hot
cigarettes
or
other smoking
ignite them, causing a damaging
Cigarette Lighter
The
Instrument Panel:
Your
Information
System
It's near the ashtray.
To
use
one, push
it in
all
the
way
and let
go.
When
it's
ready, it
will
pop
back by itself.
NOTICE:
If
you hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while it is heating, it won't be able
to
back away
from the heating element when it's ready. That
can make it overheat, damaging the lighter and
the heating element.
Your instrument panel is designed to let
you
know at a
glance how your car is running. You'll know how fast
you're going, how much fuel you're using, and many
other things you'll need
to
know to drive safely and
economically.
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets
you
see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your
odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven,
in either miles (used in the
U.S.)
or kilometers (used in
Canada).
Your Buick has a “tamper-resistant odometer.”
If
you
can see very noticeable bright silver lines between the
numbers, probably someone has tried to turn it back.
The numbers may not be true.
You may wonder what happens if a car has to have a
new odometer installed. If possible, the new one has to
be set
to
the same reading the old one had. If it can’t be,
then it’s set at zero, but
a
label
on
the driver’s door must
show the old reading and when the new one was
installed.
Trip
Odometer
A
trip odometer can tell how far you’ve gone since
you
last set it back to zero.
To
reset it, push the button.
Warning Lights, Gages and
Indicators
This section describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention
to
117
0
0
0
0
At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before the
gage reads“F”.
It
takes more (or less) gas
to
fill up than the gage
indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated
1/2
full, but it took more
(or
less) than half of the
tank’s capacity to fill it.
The gage moves a little when
you
turn a corner,
speed up, or stop your vehicle.
When you turn the engine off, the gage doesn’t go all
the way back to
“E”.
Low
Fuel
Light (Option)
If your Buick has this
option, a red light, near the
fuel gage, will go on when
you are low on fuel.
You
should get more fuel as
soon as you can.
Brake System Warning Light
I
Your Buick’s hydraulic brake system
is
divided into two
parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you
need
both parts working well.
If the warning light goes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
This light should come
on
as you start the vehicle. If
it
doesn’t come on then, have
it
fixed
so
it
will be ready to
warn you if there’s
a
problem.
This light will also come on when you set your parking
brake, and the light will stay on if your parking brake
doesn’t release fully. If
you
try to drive off with the
parking brake set, a chime will also come
on
until you
release the parking brake. If the light and chime stay on
after your parking brake is fully released, it means
you
have a brake problem. If the light and chime come on
while driving, pull
off
the road and stop carefully.
You
may notice that the pedal is harder to .push. Or, the peda
may go closer to the floor. It may take longer
to
stop. If
the light
is
still on, have the vehicle towed for service.
(See “Towing Your Car” in the Index.)
I
-
A
CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if
the brake warning light is on. Driving with the
brake warning light on can lead to an accident.
If
the light is still on after you’ve pulled off the road
and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.
1
Anti-Lock
Brake
System
Warning Light
With anti-lock, this light will go
on
when
you
start your
engine and may stay on for several seconds or
so.
That’s
normal. If the light doesn’t come on, have it fixed
so
it
will be ready to warn
you
if there is a problem.
If the light stays
on
or
comes on when you’re driving,
stop as soon as possible and turn the key
off.
Then start
the engine
to
reset the system. If the light still stays on,
or comes on again while you’re driving, your Buick
needs service. Unless the regular brake system warning
light
is
also on, you will still have brakes, but not
anti-lock brakes.
If
the regular brake system warning
light
is
also on, see “Brake System Warning Light”
earlier
in
this
part.
The anti-lock brake system warning light may also come
on when you are driving with a compact spare tire. If
this happens, the light means you won’t have anti-lock
until you replace the compact spare with a full-size tire.
If the warning light stays on after you replace the
compact spare
with
a
full-size tire, or
if
it
comes on
again when
you’re
driving, your Buick needs service.
Traction Control System Warning Light
(Option)
I
The “TRACTION
OFF”
warning light means that
the system is not working.
This warning light may
come on for the following
reasons:
If
your transaxle overheats, the traction control
system automatically shuts off for about three
minutes. The warning light will come on and stay on
during that time.
If your brakes overheat, the traction control system
will
go
off
and the warning light will come on until
your brakes cool down.
If
the “TRACTION
OFF”
warning light comes
on
and
stays on
for
an extended period of time, your vehicle
needs service.
A
CAUTION:
1
If
you let your tires spin at high speed when the
“TRACTION
OFF”
warning light is on, they can
explode and you or others could be injured. And,
spinning your tires with the “TRACTION
OFF”
warning
light
on can cause the transaxle to
overheat or can cause other problems. That
could cause an engine fire or other damage.
When you’re stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Don’t spin the wheels above
35
mph
(55
km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
I
121
I
NOTICE:
Spinning your wheels when the
“TRACTION
OFF”
warning light is on can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires.
If
you spin your
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle
back and forth, you can destroy your transaxle.
When you’re stuck, spin the wheels
as
little
as
possible.
~~~~~~
1
working.
If
you
have been operating
your
vehicle under
normal driving conditions,
you
should
pull
off
the road,
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
7
280
stop your vehicle and
turn
the
engine
off
as
soon
as
possible.
HOT
COOLANT CAN BURN
YOU
BADLY!
In “Problems
on
the Road,” this manual shows what to
do. See “Engine Overheating”
in
the Index.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
100
.Id
pointer moves into the red area, your engine is too hot!
If
you
have the Gage Cluster,
you
have a gage that
shows the engine coolant temperature.
If
the gage
This light
tells
you
that your engine coolant has
overheated or your radiator cooling fans are
not
That reading means
the
same thing as the warning light.
It means that your engine coolant has overheated.
If
you
122
have been operating your vehicle under normal driving
conditions,
you
should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
HOT
COOLANT CAN BURN
YOU
BADLY!
In “Problems
on
the Road,” this manual shows what to
do. See “Engine Overheating”
in
the Index.
Low
Coolant Warning Light
I
1
If you have this light and it
comes on, your system
is
low on coolant and the
engine may overheat.
See “Engine Coolant” in the Index and have your
vehicle serviced as soon as you can.
Engine
Oil
Pressure
Light
and
Gage
0‘
1
I
This light tells you if there could be a problem with your
engine oil pressure.
If your car has the optional gage cluster, you can read
your oil pressure directly from the gage
on
your
instrument panel.
There are three ways this light can come on briefly,
which
is
normal and doesn’t show
a
problem. They are:
The light comes on when you turn your
key
to
“Run.” It goes off once you turn
it
to “Start.” That’s
just a check to be sure the light works. If it doesn’t,
be
sure to have
it
fixed
so
it
will
be
there to warn you
if something goes wrong.
123
If you’re “idling” at a stop sign, the light may blink
on and then
off.
If
you
make a hard stop, the light may come on for a
moment.
But, when this light comes on and stays on, it means
oil isn’t going through your engine properly.
You
could
be low on oil, or you might have some other oil
problem.
A
CAUTION:
Don’t keep driving
if
the oil pressure
is
low.
If
you
do,
your engine can become
so
hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected
oil
problems can be costly and
is
not covered by
your warranty.
“Check Oil Level’’ Light (Option)
CHECK
OIL
LEVEL
The “Check
Oil
Level”
light is lit for three seconds
as a bulb check each time
the ignition key is turned
to
the
RUN
position.
If
the
light doesn’t come on, have
your vehicle serviced.
If
the
engine oil is more than
one
quart low,
the
light
will
come
on
briefly, then
go
off for
15-25
seconds, and
then come back
on
for
20-40
seconds.
However,
if
it
has not been more than eight minutes
since the engine was last shut
off,
the system will
not
register low engine oil condition.
If
the
“Check Oil Level” light comes back on, the
engine
oil
should be checked at
the
dipstick and
then
brought up to the proper level
if
necessary. See “Engine
Oil”
in
the Index.
“Change
Oil
Soon”
Light
(Option)
CHANGE
OIL
SOON
This light is activated by
the Engine Oil Life
Monitor System. It
indicates that the engine oil
has degraded enough to
require changing. (See
“Engine Oil” in the Index).
This is determined by electronically monitoring engine
speed, coolant temperature and vehicle speed. Since the
change interval is dependent upon driving habits and
conditions, the “Change Oil Soon” light may come on as
early as
2,000
miles or less for harsh conditions.
The “Change Oil Soon” light
is
lit
for three seconds as
a
bulb check each time the ignition key is turned
to
the
RUN
position. If an oil change is required,
it
will stay
on for
60
seconds each time the engine is started. If
the
“Change Oil Soon” light is
on
continuously, there is a
problem with the Oil Life Monitor System and service is
required.
After
changing;
the engine oil,
the
system should be
-
reset. This will cause the “Change Oil Soon” light once
again,
to
be lit for
just
the bulb check period of three
seconds.
The reset button is.inside this hole, which is under the
passenger’s side of the instrument panel, near the door.
With the ignition key in the
RUN
position, but the
engine not started, use a pen to push the reset button,
holding
it
in
for at least
5
seconds but not more than
60
seconds. After
5
seconds, the “Change Oil Soon” light
will
flash
4
times and then
go
off.
This indicates that the
Oil Life Monitor System has been reset.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service Engine Soon Light)
SERVICE
ENGINE
SO0
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
A
computer monitors operation
of
your fuel, ignition
and emission control systems. This light should come on
when
the ignition is on, but the engine is not running, as
a
check
to
show you it
is
working. If
it
does not come on
at all, have
it
fixed right away.
If
it
stays on, or
it
comes
on
while you are driving, the computer is indicating that
you have a problem. You should take your vehicle
in
for
service soon.
NOTICE:
If
you keep driving your vehicle with this light on-
after a while the emission controls won’t work as
1
well, your fuel economy won’t be as good and
your engine may not run as smoothly. This could
lead
to
costly rer>airs not covered by your
warranty.
Battery Light
VOLTS
When you turn
the
key to
RUN,
this light will come on
briefly, to show that your alternator and battery charging
systems are working. If a light stays
on,
you need
126
service, and you should take your Buick to the dealer at
once. To save your battery
until
you
get there, turn
off
all accessories, and set your air system to
OFF.
Volts Gage
8
I
If
you have the optional gage cluster, you have this gage
that shows voltage
in
the electrical system. The normal
range
is
11
to
15
volts. If the reading stays outside the
normal range, have your Buick dealer check the
electrical system.
Tachometer
2'
\
\
f
5
c
The tachometer tells you how fast
the
engine is running.
It
displays engine speed in thousands
of
revolutions per
minute
(RPM).
I
NOTICE:
I
Do
not operate the engine with the tachometer in
the red area, or engine damage may occur.
I
127
Door
Ajar
Light (Option)
1
When the ignition is
ON,
this light will stay
on
until
all the doors are closed and
completely latched.
I
Trunk
Ajar
Light (Option)
If
this light stays on with
the ignition
ON,
it means
that the trunk lid is open or
not completely latched.
128
@
Part
3
Comfort Controls
&
Audio
Systems
.
I
In this part you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control systems and audio systems offered with your Buick
.
Be sure to read about the particular system supplied with your vehicle
.
Part
3
includes:
Comfort Control System
............................................................
130
Heater and Defroster
................................................
132.136. 138
Airconditioner
...........................................................
132. 137
RearWindowDefogger
........................................................
136
Ventilation
...............................................................
132. 138
Audiosystems
....................................................................
139
Setting the Clock
..................................................
142.145.148. 151
Radio Controls
..................................................
141.144.147. 150
TapePlayerControls
................................................
143. 145. 148
CDPlayerControls
............................................................
151
Understanding Radio Reception
...................................................
139
Care of Cassette Tape Player
&
Tapes
.............................................
155
CareofCompactDiscs
.........................................................
155
Antennacare
................................................................
156
Your
Buick
Comfort System
This part tells
you
how
to make your air system work
for
you.
Outside Air
Fresh air from outside your vehicle flows through your
Buick when the car is moving. When the vehicle is not
moving, you can get outside air to flow through by
selecting any air choice (except the rear window
defogger) and the
HI
fan
speed.
Air Outlets
Adjust the direction
of
air
flow
by
moving
the
louvered vents.
Rear Passenger ComforTemp (Option)
If
you have this option, you can adjust the direction of
the air flow to
the
rear seating area.
If your Buick has the Dual Automatic ComforTemp
Climate Control option,
it
looks like this:
Ext
Temp
I
EXT.
The following information tells you how
it
works.
You
will hear a beep each time a button is pushed. The
display will show fan, temperature and mode settings.
Push this and the display will indicate the outside
temperature (Unless
the
system
is
OFF).
Push it again to
return to the regular system display.
CooVWarm
Off
r--
i
c
F
\
To choose the temperature you want maintained inside
the
car, push one of
these.
You can choose from
60
OF
(16
"C),
for maximum
cooling, and
90"
F
(33
"C),
for maximum heating. It is
not necessary to choose the extreme temperature to get
the system to heat
or
cool at the maximum. The system
does
it
automatically.
E
Til
When the system
is
off, the ventilation system will allow
air to flow through your Buick when the vehicle
is
moving. The system will try to keep the air at the chosen
temperature, unless
it
is very hot or very cold. The
outside temperature will show in the display area when
the system is
OFF.
Auto
Dual
Zone
,
w.
.. .
.
,
... ,
-*FBr
AUTO
When the system
is
set for
automatic, air will come
from the
floor
outlets, the
instrument panel outlets or
both. Fan speed will vary
(unless a blower
LO
or HI
button has been pushed) as
the system gets to and
maintains the temperature
setting you have selected.
The display will show the set temperature and blower
speed.
In cold weather the system will delay turning on the fan,
to avoid blowing cold air. The length of the delay
depends on engine coolant temperature, outside
temperature and time since the engine was last started.
Pushing a
LO
or HI blower button will override this
delay, and cause the fan to start.
To
rid the system of stale air in warm weather, air will
come out of the floor outlets for
a
short time.
The front seat passenger can control the air temperature
in their seating area.
__.
ylrr
The
air temperature for the right side of the front seat
can
be set using the control on the passenger’s door.
Both DUAL
ZONE
and AUTO buttons
will
light up. To
turn
off this part
of
the system, push the DUAL
ZONE
button
again.
r
The right front seat
passenger
can
also
activate
the
DUAL
ZONE
function
by pressing the
WARM
or
COOL
buttons
on
the
passenger door.
The indicator above the control will show the difference
from the main temperature setting.
Fan
Speeds
The speed of
the
blower fan
is
controlled automatically
if
you
have the fan on
AUTO.
1
.II
W
E
If
you
want the blower
fan
to
run
at lower speed, push
the
LO
button. The blower
speed will decrease with
every push of the button
,
until the lowest speed is
I
reached*
r.c
c-
t
1
HI
t
If
you want to raise
the
blower speed, push
HI.
The
blower speed will increase
with every push
of
the
button until maximum
speed is reached.
Econ
Defog
Htr
You can use
ECON
when
you don't need to cool the
outside air. The system will
work like the AUTO mode
without cooling. The air
flow will come from the
instrument panel outlets.
ECON
does not have the
blower delay feature as the
AUTO mode setting.
L
E
HTR
E
To warm the air, press
'
and adjust the temperature
and fan speed for your
comfort. Most
of
the air
will come from the floor
outlets.
la
c
I
When the outside
temperature is mild, use
DEFOG
to keep fog
off
the
windshield.
Air entering the vehicle will be evenly split between the
floor outlets and the outlets near the windshield.
The blower speed will be controlled automatically, but
you can choose another fan speed by pushing the
HI
or
LO
buttons.
135
Defrost
Rear
Window
Defogger
This setting will direct most
of the air flow toward the
windshield. Use
DEFROST
when there is fog or ice on
the-windshield.
Defrost will work better if any ice and snow is cleared
from the hood and the air inlet area between the hood
and the windshield.
Blower speed will be controlled automatically, but
you
can choose another speed by pushing the HI or
LO
buttons.
The lines
you
see
on the
rear window will warm the
glass. Press the button to
start warming your
window.
After
10
minutes, it will go
off
by itself, or pressing the
button again during the
heating cycle will shut it
off.
If
you
need additional
warming time, push the
button again.
c.
i
If
you
have the heated outside rearview mirror option,
the mirror will be warmed when the rear defogger is on.
1.
i
NOTICE:
,
.'
'2
,
..
,
,..
~.
,
..~
I:
Scraping the inside
of
your rear window could
cut and damage the heater. Your warranty would
If your Buick has the Electronic Touch Climate Control
System, the following information
tells
you
how it
works.
Air Conditioner
The next three selections cool the air. The air
conditioner won't work well unless all the windows are
1
closed.
On
very hot days, open the windows long
~
~ ~
enough to let
the
hot
inside air
out.
This reduces the
i
amount of work your air conditioner's compressor will
have to do, which should help fuel economy.
Max
This setting provides maximum cooling with
the
least
amount of work.
MAX
recirculates much of the air
inside your vehicle
so
it maximizes your air
conditioner's performance and fuel economy.
Fan
Speeds
The
fan
control is used to select the speed
you
want
the
blower to control
the
air
flow.
Lever
Controls
The upper lever changes the fan speeds. The lower lever
changes the temperature of the air coming through your
air outlets.
Norm
Use
NORM
for normal cooling on hot days. This setting
cools outside air and directs
it
through the instrument
panel outlets.
Bi-Level
This setting is designed for use on sunny days when the
air
is
only moderately warm or cool. On days like these,
the sun may adequately warm your upper body, but your
lower body may not be warm enough.
The Bi-level setting directs outside air into your vehicle
in two ways. Cool air is directed toward your upper
body through instrument panel outlets, while slightly
warmed air is directed through the heater outlet at your
feet.
The air conditioner compress& operates in all Air
Conditioning positions and the Defrost position when
the outside temperature is above
48
OF
(9
“C).
When you don’t need to cool the outside air, use the
VENT, HEAT and
DEFROST
settings. Adjust the
temperature control for comfort. You’ll get better fuel
economy (gas mileage) if you’re not cooling the outside
air. When you cool the air, your engine runs a
refrigeration compressor, and it has to work harder.
Vent
For mild outside temperature, when little heating or
cooling is needed, use the
VENT
setting. Air will flow
thought the instrument panel outlets. Use the air outlets
to turn on, adjust and turn
off
the air flow. Adjust the
temperature lever
to
the desired temperature.
Heater
When outside temperatures are cold, pressing the
HTR
setting and adjusting the temperature lever will send
warm air through the floor outlets and some through the
defroster vents.
Defrost
The DEFROST setting directs most
of
the air flow
toward the windshield. Use defrost when you want to
remove
fog
or ice from the windshield. When it’s
48OF
(9
*
C) or warmer, you’ll get cooled air.
Defog
Air entering the vehicle will be evenly split between the
floor outlets and the outlets near the windshield. You
can control the temperature of the air and the fan speed
to clear the foggy windows.
138
Rear
Window
Defogger
The lines you see on the
rear window warm the
glass. Press the button to
start warming your
window. After 10 minutes,
it will
go
off by itself, or
pressing the button again
during the heating cycle
will shut it off. If
you
need
additional warming time,
push the button again.
NOTICE:
Scraping the inside
of
your rear window could
cut and damage the heater. Your warranty would
not cover this damage. And don’t put decals
there, you might have to scrape them
off.
Audio Systems
Your Delco@ audio system has been designed to operate
easily and give years
of
listening pleasure. But you will
get the most enjoyment out
of
it if you acquaint yourself
with
it
first. Find out what your DelcoB system can do
and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re
getting
the
most out of
the
advanced engineering that
went into
it.
FM
Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound. But FM signals
will reach only about 10 to
40
miles (16
to
65 km). And,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
AM
The range for most AM stations
1s
greater than for
FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise.
139
AM.Stereo
This means the Delco@ system can receive C-QUAM@
stereo broadcasts. Many AM stations around the country
use C-QUAM@
to
produce stereo, though some do not.
(C-QUAM@ is a registered trademark
of
Motorola, Inc.)
If
your Delco@ system can get C-QUAM@, your
“STEREO” light will come on when you’re receiving it.
A
CAUTION:
nearing damage from loud noise is almost
undetectable until it is too late. Your hearing
can
adapt to higher volumes
of
sound. Sound that
seems normal can be loud and harmful to your
hearing. Take precautions by adjusting the
volume control on your radio to a safe sound
level before your hearing adapts to it.
To
help avoid hearing
loss
or damage:
Adjust the volume control to the lowest
Increase volume slowly
until
you hear
setting.
comfortably and clearly.
telephone or two-way radio
--
be sure you ca
add what you want.
If
you can, it’s very important
to do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s
engine, Delco’ radio or other systems,
and
even
damage them. And, your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation
of
sound equipment
that has been added improperly.
So,
before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer
and
be sure to check Federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
..
140
-
To
Play
This Radio
The Upper
Knob
The upper knob does these things:
It turns the system on and
off.
It controls the volume.
It tells you the time. (When the ignition is
off,
push
the knob to display the time.)
It allows you to hear the orner side of a tape. (Press
When the radio is playing, with the time displayed, it
the
knob while a cassette is playing.)
can tell
you
the frequency (push the knob).
BAL
The BALANCE control behind the upper knob allows
you
to balance the sound between the right and left
speakers.
The
Lower
Knob
Turn the lower knob to tune radio stations. Push it to get
AM or FM.
FADE
The FADE control behind the lower knob moves the
sound between your front and rear speakers.
SEEK
Pressing
the
SEEK
button will cause the receiver to seek
the next higher station and stop.
SCAN
When you press
SCAN,
the radio will
go
to the
next
station and pause and keep doing that until you press
SCAN again. SCAN appears
in
the display.
141
Pushbuttons
Clock
The four pushbuttons let you return
to
favorite stations.
You
can set the pushbuttons for up to fourteen stations
(7
AM and
7
FM).
0
Tune in the desired station.
0
Press the SET pushbutton. SET appears in the
display.
0
Within
5
seconds, push one of the four pushbuttons.
Whenever you press that button, the preset station will
return.
Up to three more stations may be preset on each band by
pressing two pushbuttons that are next to each other, at
the same time.
0
Tune in the desired station.
Press the SET pushbutton.
0
Within the
5
seconds, press any
two
pushbuttons that
are next to each other. (The station will return when
the same two pushbuttons are pressed again.)
To set the clock:
0
Press the SET button.
0
Within
5
seconds, press and hold
SCAN
until the
correct hour appears on the display.
0
Press and hold SEEK until the correct minute
appears on the display.
TREBLE
Slide the TREBLE lever up
to
increase the treble
response. If the station is weak or noisy, slide the
TREBLE lever down to reduce the noise.
BASS
Slide the BASS lever
up
to increase the bass response.
Adjust the BASS lever to give a pleasing sound to your
ear.
DNR@
This is the Dynamic Noise Reduction button, DNR@
helps remove background hiss from
the
radio or tape
player.
You
may want to leave
it
pushed in all the time.
To
Play
A
Cassette
PROGRAM
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
30
to
45
minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are
so
thin they may not work well in this player.
With
the
radio on, press a tape into the slot marked
AUTO REVERSE (the tape side goes in first).
Once the tape is playing, use the upper and lower knobs
for volume, balance, and fade just as you did for radio.
The arrows indicate which side
of
the tape is being
played.
When the end of the tape is reached, it will
automatically reverse and play the other side of the tape.
FWD
To rapidly advance the tape, press
b
and the tape
will
rapidly go forward
until
you press the
4
button or
STOP-EJECT
lightly.
REV
To rapidly reverse the tape, press
4
and the tape
will
rapidly go backward
until
you press
the
b
button or
STOP-EJECT lightly.
To
go
from one side of the tape to
the
other, press the
RCL-PROG (upper knob). Note the lighted
arrows
next
to the and
4.
STOP-E
JECT
To remove or stop the tape and switch to radio, press the
STOP-EJECT button.
143
To
Play This Radio
PWR
To turn the radio on, press the PWR button.
The
Upper Knob
0
It
allows
you
to mute the radio or tape play. Press to
mute; press again to listen.
BAL
The control behind the upper knob allows you
to
balance the sound between the right and left speakers.
Notice the display arrow to
see
where the balance is set.
The Lower Knob
Turn the lower knob to tune radio stations. The tune
knob increases and decreases frequency when it is held
slightly rotated against the spring load. Push it to get
AM
or
FM
frequency.
FADE
The control behind the lower knob moves the sound
between your front and rear speakers. Notice the display
arrow to see how the
FADE
is set.
RCL
It tells you the time or the radio frequency. (When
the
ignition is off, push
RCL
to
display the time.) With the
radio on, and the time displayed, push it to display the
frequency.
SEEK
4
or
b
Pressing the
SEEK
4
or
b
button will cause the
receiver to seek the next lower or higher station and
stop.
The upper knob does these things:
0
It controls the volume. The volume knob increases
and decreases volume when it is held slightly rotated
against the spring load.
144
SCAN
When you press
SCAN,
the
radio
will
go to the next
station and pause and keep doing that until
you
press
SCAN
again.
SC
will appear in the display.
Pushbuttons
The five pushbuttons let you return to favorite stations.
You
can set the pushbuttons for up to ten stations
(5
AM
and
5
FM).
Tune in the desired station.
Push the SET button.
Within
5
seconds, push one of the five pushbuttons.
SET will disappear from the display when the station
is set.
Whenever you press that button, the preset station will
return.
Clock
To set the clock:
Press the SET button.
Within
5
seconds, press and hold SCAN until the
correct hour appears on the display.
Press and hold
SEEK
until
the correct minute
appears
on
the display.
To
Adjust
The
Tone
Use
the
levers next to the display to
set
the bass,
midrange, and treble until
you
get the sound you want.
The
60
and
250
levers adjust the bass;
1K
is midrange;
3.5K
and
10
K
control the treble.
We suggest you start with the center lever
(1K)
in the
midpoint position, then move the others up or down
until you get the amount of bass and treble you like.
To
Play
A
Cassette
Your tape player is built to work best
with
tapes that are
30
to
45
minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are
so
thin they may not work well in this player.
With the radio on, press a tape into the slot marked
AUTO REVERSE (the tape side goes in first).
Once the tape is playing, use the upper and lower knobs
for volume, balance, and fade just as you did for the
radio. The arrow
in
the graphic display above the word
TAPE indicates which side
of
the tape
is
being played.
When the end of the tape is reached, it
will
automatically reverse and play the other side of the tape.
.
-,
145
PROG PREV
To
go
from one side of the tape to
the
other, press the
PROG button. The PROG button will also stop REV,
FWD, PREV or NEXT and play the tape.
Cr02
This button sets the tape bias. When playing high bias
chrome or metal tapes, press the button to turn the Cr02.
on. Cr02 will appear in the display. When playing
standard bias tapes, press again to turn the Cr02 off.
REV
To rapidly reverse the tape, press REV and the tape will
rapidly reverse to the beginning
of
the tape or
until
you
press the PROG or REV button again. The radio will
play during reverse.
FWD
To
rapidly advance the tape, press
FWD
and the tape
will rapidly go forward to the end
of
the tape or
until
you press the
PROG
or FWD button again. The radio
will play during forward,
To
hear a passage on the tape that has just played, press
PREV and the tape will back up and stop, at either the
first 4-second quiet spot
in
the
tape, or
when
you
press
PREV again.
NEXT
To go directly to the next selection on the tape, press
NEXT.
A
4-second quiet interval must be present for the
tape to stop. Pressing PROG or NEXT again will play
the tape.
EJECT
To
remove or stop the tape and switch to radio, press the
EJECT button.
ST-PL
To
immediately switch from tape to radio, press the
ST-PL button and the radio will resume playing the
station that was tuned in when you inserted a tape.
Pressing ST-PL again will allow the tape to resume
where
it
stopped.
To
Play
This
Radio
PWR
To turn the radio on, press
the
PWR button.
The Upper Knob
The upper knob does these things:
It controls the volume. The volume knob increases
and decreases volume when it is held slightly rotated
against the spring load.
It allows you to mute the radio or tape player. Press
The sound balance for the Delco-Bose radio is preset.
to mute; press again to listen.
The Lower Knob
Turn the lower knob to tune radio stations. The tune
knob increases and decreases station frequency when it
is held slightly rotated against the spring load. Push
it
to
get AM or
FM
frequency.
FADE
The control behind
the
lower knob moves the sound
between your front and rear speakers. Notice the display
arrow to see how FADE is set.
RCL
It tells you the time or the radio frequency. When the
ignition is
off,
push RCL to display the time. With the
radio on, and the time displayed, push it to see the
frequency.
SEEK
4
or
b
Pressing the
SEEK
4
or
b
will cause the receiver to
seek the next lower or higher station and stop.
SCAN
Clock
When
you
press SCAN, the radio will go to the next
station and pause and keep doing that until
you
press
SCAN again. SC will appear in the display.
Pushbuttons
The five pushbuttons let you return to favorite stations.
You can set the pushbuttons for up to ten stations
(5
AM
and
5
FM).
0
Tune in the desired station.
0
Press the SET pushbutton. (Note: The display will
shQw SET for about
5
seconds.)
0
Within
5
seconds, push one of the five pushbuttons.
SET will disappear from the display when the station
is set.
Whenever you press that pushbutton again, the preset
station will return.
To set the clock:
0
Press the SET pushbutton.
Within
5
seconds, press and hold SCAN until the
correct hour appears on the display.
0
Press and hold SEEK
4
or until the correct minute
appears on the display.
To Adjust
The
Tone
BASS adjusts the bass response up or down. TREB
adjusts the treble response up or down. If the station is
weak or noisy, adjust the TREBLE.down to reduce the
noise. Pressing either button in the center will set the
bass or treble
level
to a factory preset level.
To
Play
A
Cassette
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
30
to
45
minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are
so
thin they may not work well in this player.
With the radio on, press a tape into the
slot
marked
AUTO REVERSE (the tape side goes in first).
Once the tape is playing, use the upper and lower knobs
for volume, and fade just
as
you did for radio. The arrow
in the graphic.display above the word TAPE indicates
which side of the tape is being played. When the end
of
the tape is reached, it will automatically reverse and
play the other side of the tape.
PROG
To go from one side of the tape to the other, press the
PROG button. The PROG button will also stop REV,
FWD, PREV or NEXT and play the tape,
Cr02
This button sets the tape bias. When playing high bias
chrome or metal tapes, press the button to turn the Cr02
on. Cr02 will appear
in
the display. When playing
standard bias tapes, press again to turn the Cr02 off.
REV
To
reverse the tape, press REV and the tape will rapidly
reverse
to
the beginning of
the
tape
or
until you press
the PROG or REV button again. The radio will play
during reverse.
FWD
To
advance the tape, press FWD and the tape will
rapidly
go
forward to the end
of
the tape, or until you
press the PROG or FWD button again. The radio will
play during forward.
PREV
To hear a passage on the tape that has just played, press
PREV and the tape will back up and stop, at either the
first 4-second quiet spot in the tape, or when you press
PROG or PREV again.
NEXT
To go directly
to
the next selection on the tape, press
NEXT.
A
4-second quiet interval must be present for the
tape to stop. Pressing PROG or NEXT again will play
the tape.
EJECT
To remove or stop the tape and switch to radio, press the
EJECT button.
ST-PL
To
immediately switch from tape to radio, press the
ST-PL button and the radio will resume playing the
station that was tuned in when you inserted a tape.
Pressing
ST-PL
again will resume playing the tape
where it was stopped.
4
'W
.r.
To
Play
This
Radio
PWR
To turn the radio on, press the PWR button.
The Upper Knob
The upper knob does these things:
0
It controls the volume. The volume knob increases
and decreases volume when it is held slightly rotated
against the spring load.
It
allows
you
to mute the radio or
CD
player. Press to
mute; press again to listen.
BAL
The control behind the upper knob allows you to
balance the sound between the right and left speakers.
Notice
the
display arrow to see where
the
balance is
set.
The
Lower
Knob
Turn the lower knob
to
tune radio stations. The tune
knob increases and decreases station frequency when it
is held slightly rotated against the spring load. Turn the
knob to tune slowly. If you hold it for more than a few
seconds, it will tune rapidly. Push it to get
AM
or FM.
FADE
The control behind the lower knob moves the sound
between your front and rear speakers. Notice the display
arrow to see how FADE is set.
RCL
It tells you the time
or
the radio frequency. When the
ignition is
off,
push RCL to display the time. When
the
radio on, and
the
time displayed, push it
to
see the
frequency.
SEEK
4
or
Pressing the SEEK
4
or will cause the receiver to
seek the next lower or higher station and stop.
SCAN
When you press
SCAN,
the radio will go to the next
station and pause and keep doing that until you press
SCAN
again.
SC
will appear in the display.
Pushbuttons
The five pushbuttons let you return to favorite stations.
You
can set the pushbuttons for up
to
ten stations
(5
AM
and
5
FM).
Tune in the desired station.
Press the SET pushbutton.
0
Within
5
seconds, push one of the five pushbuttons.
SET will disappear from the display when the station
is
set.
Whenever
you
press that button, the preset station will
return.
Clock
To set the clock:
0
Press the SET pushbutton.
0
Within
5
seconds, press and hold
SCAN
until the
correct hour appears on the display.
0
Press and hold SEEK or
4
until the correct minute
appears on the display.
To Adjust The Tone
Use the levers next to the display to set the bass,
midrange, and treble until you get the sound you like.
The
60
and
250
levers adjust the bass; 1K is midrange;
-3.5K
and
10
K
control the treble.
We suggest
you
start with the center lever (1K) in the
midpoint position, then move the others up or down
until you get the amount
of
bass and treble
you
like.
To
Play
A
Compact Disc
Before you begin, please note:
DO
NOT
use mini-discs
that are called singles. They won’t eject.
Use
full-size
compact
discs
only.
If the disc player is very hot
or
if
you’re driving on a
very rough road, the disc may come out, or just not play.
ERR will appear
in
the
display.
As
soon as things get
back to normal, the disc should play again.
Press PWR to turn the system on.
Insert
a
disc partway into
the
slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. Wait a few seconds and the disc
should play.
If the disc comes back out, check whether:
The disc is upside down.
It is dirty, scratched, or wet.
There’s too much moisture in the air. (If there is,
wait about one hour and try again.)
RCL
Press RCL to see what track
is
playing. Press it again
within
5
seconds to see
how
long the CD has been
playing that track. The display will automatically return
to
the time
of
day.
The track number also appears when you change the
volume, or when a new track starts to play.
COMP
Pressing the COMP button makes
soft
and loud passages
more equal in volume.
COMP
will appear in the display.
RDM
The RDM button means random and when
it
is
pressed,
your
CD
player will play the tracks in random order
rather than sequential
1,2,3
...
order. Pressing RDM
again will play the disc in sequential order.
REV
Press and hold REV
to
return rapidly
to
a
favorite
passage in a track. Note the seconds counter reading in
the display. Release it to play the passage.
FWD
Press and hold FWD
to
advance quickly within
a
track.
Release it to resume playing. Watch
the
display to ston
at
a
specific passage.
PREV
Press PREV to hear the previous track.
If
you
hold this
button or press it more than once,
the
disc will retreat
to
previous tracks.
NEXT
Press NEXT to hear the next track now (instead of
waiting until the present track is finished.) If you hold
this button, or press it more than once, the disc will
advance further.
STlPL
Press ST/PL (Stop/Play) and the disc will stop and the
radio will play. Press ST/PL again
to
restart
the
disc
at
the point where it stopped.
Press the PWR button or turn the ignition key
off
to stop
the disc player. The disc stays in the player and will
resume playing at the point where it stopped.
EJECT
Press EJCT, the disc will eject and the radio will play.
The disc will start at track
1
when you reinsert it.
As a feature to protect the disc,
if
you
turn
the ignition
off
with the disc partway out of the slot (after eject),
it
will
be
drawn back into the player
in
about
30
seconds. The disc
will play at track
1
when the radio is turned on again.
Anti-Theft Feature
Delco-Loc I1 is a security feature for the compact disc
player. It can be used or ignored.
If
ignored, the system
plays normally. If it is used, your player won’t be usable
if it’s ever stolen, because it won’t turn on.
The
instructions below
tell
you how to enter your
personal secret code into the system. If your vehicle loses
battery power for any reason, you must unlock the system
with the secret code again before the system will
turn
on.
Be sure to read through the entire procedure and become
familiar with
the
appropriate buttons and knobs before
starting.
Step
1.
Write clown any 6-digit number and keep it in a
safe place.
Step
2.
Turn the ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
Step
3.
Press PWR to
turn
the radio
off.
Step
4.
Press preset
1
and
4
buttons together. Hold them
until
“---”
shows on the display (at least
5
seconds).
You are now ready to enter your secret code. If you
pause more than
15
seconds between steps you may
have to start over.
Step
5.
Press SET and
“000”
will appear on the display.
Step 6. Press SEEK and hold
it
until the first digit of
your code appears.
Step 7. Rotate the tune knob right or left to make the
next two numbers agree
with
your code.
Step
8.
Press AM-FM knob and
“000”
will appear. Now
you are ready to enter the second three digits of the code
according to steps
6
and
7.
Step
9.
Press
the
AM-FM knob. The display will show
“rEP” for
5
seconds, and then
“OOO”
will appear indicating
that some steps are to
be
repeated for verification.
Step
10.
Repeat steps 6,7, and
8.
Step
11.
Press the AM-FM knob. If the display shows
“SEC”, the verification process was successful and the
system
is
SECURE. If
the
display shows
“---”,
the
verification steps were not successful and the entire
sequence must be started again.
To
Unlock
The System After
a
Power
Loss
When battery power is reapplied to a secured radio, the
radio won’t turn on and
“LOC”
will appear in the
display.
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15
seconds between steps.
Step
1.
Turn the ignition
ON
(Radio
off.)
Step
2.
Press the SET button. The display will show
“000”.
Step
3.
Enter the six digits of the code following steps
6
thru
9
on the preceding page. The display will show the
number as entered.
Step
4.
Press the AM/FM button and the time appears
-
indicating that the disabling sequence was successful. If
the display indicates “SEC”, the number did not match
and the unit is still secured.
Disabling
The Theft System
Step
1.
Press presets
1
and
4
for
5
seconds with the
ignition “On” and radio power “Off
”.
The display will
show
“SEC”,
indicating the unit is in the secure mode.
Step
2.
Press the SET button. The display will show
“000”.
Step
3.
Enter the first three digits of the code following
step
6
and
7
of the preceding directions. The display will
show the numbers as entered.
Step
4.
Press the AM-FM button. The radio will display
“000”.
Step
5.
Enter the second three digits
of
the code. The
display will show the numbers as entered.
Step
6.
Press the AM-FM button. If the display shows
“
---
”
,
the
disabling sequence was successful. (The
numbers matched the user-selected code or the factory
back-up code) and the unit is in the UNSECURED
mode.
If
the display shows “SEC”, the disabling
sequence was unsuccessful and the numbers did not
match either
of
the codes and the unit will remain in the
SECURED mode.
Care
of
Your Cassette Tape Player
A
tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or cause failure
of
the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly each
month or after every
15
hours of use. If you notice a
reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to
see
if the tape or the tape player is at fault. If this other
cassette has no improvement in sound quality, clean the
tape player.
Clean your tape player with a wiping-action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette, and follow the directions
provided with it.
Cassettes
are
subject to wear and
the
sound quality may
degrade over time. Always make sure that the cassette
tape is
in
good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care
of
Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them
in
their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If
the
surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth
in
a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean
it,
wiping from the center to
the
edge.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and
the
outer edge.
155
I
NOTICE:
I
Don’t lubricate the power antenna. Lubrication
could damage it.
If
the mast portion of your antenna is damaged,
you
can
easily replace it. See your dealer for a replacement kit
and follow the instructions in the kit.
I
NOTICE:
.
,.
:.
.
..
157
I
I931
Buick
Model
90
@
Part
4
Your
Driving and
the
Road
~
.
~~~~~ ~~~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ ~~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ ~
Here you’ll find information about driving
on
different kinds
of
roads and in varying weather conditions
.
We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving
.
Part
4
includes:
RoadSigns
.......................................................................
DefensiveDriving
.................................................................
DrunkenDriving
................................................................
Control
of
a Vehicle
.........................
...................................
Braking
.....................................................................
Steering
.....................................................................
Passing
.....................................................................
LossofControl
...............................................................
DrivingatNight
...................................................................
DrivingintheRain
.................................................................
Driving
in
Fog, Mist and Haze
........................................................
CityDriving
......................................................................
FreewayDriving
...................................................................
DrivingonaLongTrip
.............................................................
HillandMountainRoads
............................................................
ParkingonHills
...................................................................
TowingaTrailer
...................................................................
WinterDriving
....................................................................
160
166
167
170
171
176
178
180
181
183
186
187
188
190
192
194
197
201
I
Color
of
Road
Signs
B
n
RED
means STOP. It may also indicate that some
movement is not allowed. Examples are
DO NOT
ENTER
and
WRONG
WAY.
Road
Signs
The road signs you see everywhere are coded by color,
shape and symbols.
It’s
a good idea to know these
codes
so
that you can quickly grasp the basic meaning
or intent
of
the sign even before you have
a
chance to
read
it.
RAILROAD
ADVANCE
I
CROSSING
W
NARROW
BRIDGE
h
LOW WORKERS
SHOULDER FLAGGER AHEAD AHEAD
YELLOW
indicates a general warning. Slow down and
be careful when you see a yellow sign. It may signal a
railroad crossing ahead, a no passing zone, or some
other potentially dangerous situation. Likewise, a yellow
solid line painted on the road means “Don’t Cross.’’
ORANGE
indicates road construction or maintenance.
You’ll want to slow down when you see an orange sign,
as part of the road may be closed
off
or
tom
up.
And
there may be workers and maintenance vehicles around,
too.
Shape
of
Road
Signs
The shape
of
the sign will tell
you
something, too.
v
7
v
ST0
P
$&
An OCTAGONAL
(eight-sided) sign
means STOP. It is
always red with white
letters.
/
A DIAMOND-shaped
sign is a warning of
something ahead
-
for
example, a curve, steep
hill, soft shoulder, or a
narrow bridge.
A TRIANGLE, pointed
downward, indicates
YIELD. It assigns the
right-of-way
to
traffic
on certain approaches
to an intersection.
A TRIANGULAR sign
also is used on
two-lane roads to
indicate a
NO
PASSING
ZONE.
This
sign will
be
on the left
side
of
the roadway.
163
KEEP
RIGHT
IIoNLV!
\
,
LEFT
OR
RIGHT
TURN
THROUGH
ONLY
RECTANGULAR
(square or oblong) signs show speed
limits, parking regulations, give directions, and such
information as distances to cities.
Symbols on
Road
Signs
x
There are many international road signs in use today.
The basic message
of
many of these signs is in pictures
or graphic symbols.
A
picture within a circle with a
diagonal line across it shows what
not
to do.
Traffic
Lights
Lm
We’re all familiar with traffic lights or stop lights. Often
green arrows are being used in the lights for improved
traffic control. On some multilane roads, green arrows
light up, indicating that traffic in one or more lanes
can
move or make a turn. Green arrows don’t mean “go no
matter what.” You’ll still need to proceed with caution,
yielding the right of way to pedestrians and sometimes
to other vehicles.
Some traffic lights also use red arrows to signify that
you
must stop before turning on red.
x
REVERSIBLE
LANE
ON
LANE
ROADWAY
MULTI-
U
Many city roads and expressways, and even bridges, use
reversible-lane traffic control during rush hours.
A
red
X
light above a lane means no driving in that lane at that
165
time.
A
green arrow means you may drive in that lane.
Look
for the signs posted
to
warn drivers what hours
and days these systems are in effect.
Pavement Markings
NO
PASSING
ZONE
Pavement markings add
to
traffic signs and signals.
They give information to drivers without taking
attention from the roadway. A solid yellow line
on
your
side of the road
or
lane means “don’t cross.”
Your Own Signals
Drivers signal to others, too. It’s not only more polite,
it’s safer to let other drivers know what you are doing.
And in some places the law requires driver signals.
Turn and lane change signals. Always signal when you
plan to turn or change lanes.
If
necessary, you can use hand signals out the window:
Left arm straight
out
for
a
left turn, down for slow or
about-to-stop, and up for a right turn.
Slowing down. If time allows, tap the brake pedal once
or twice in advance of slowing or stopping. This warns
the driver behind you.
Disabled. Your four-way flashers signal that your
vehicle
is
disabled or is a hazard. See “Hazard Warning
Flashers” in the Index.
Traffic Officer
The traffic police officer is also
a
source
of
important
information. The officer’s signals govern, no matter
what the traffic lights or other signs say.
The next section discusses some of the road conditions
you may encounter.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving
is:
Drive
defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
Buick: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Expect children to dash out from behind parked cars,
often followed by other children. Expect occupants in
parked cars to open doors into traffic. Watch for
movement in parked cars
--
someone may be about to
open a door.
Expect other drivers to run stop signs when you are on
a
through street. Be ready to brake if necessary as
you
go
through intersections. You may not have to use the
brake, but if
you
do, you will be ready.
If you’re driving through a shopping center parking lot
where there are well-marked lanes, directional arrows,
and designated parking areas, expect some drivers to
ignore all these markings and dash straight toward one
part of the
lot.
Pedestrians can be careless. Watch for them. In general,
you must give way to pedestrians even if you know you
have the right of way.
Rear-end collisions are about
the
most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front
of
you
is going
to
brake
or
turn
suddenly.
Here’s a final bit
of
information about defensive driving.
The most dangerous time for driving in the
U.S.
is very
early on Sunday morning. In fact,
GM
Research studies
show that the most and the least dangerous times for
driving, every week, fall on the same day. That day is
Sunday. The most dangerous time
is
Sunday from
3
a.m.
to
4
a.m. The safest time is Sunday from
10
a.m. to
11
a.m. Driving the same distance on a Sunday at
3
a.m.
isn’t just a little more dangerous than it is at
10
a.m. It’s
about
134
times more dangerous!
That leads
to
the next section.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving
is
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to the
highway death
toll,
claiming thousands of victims every
year. Alcohol takes away three things that anyone needs
to drive a vehicle:
0
Judgment
0
Muscular Coordination
0
Vision
Police records show that half
of
all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol
-
a driver, a
passenger or someone else, such as a pedestrian, had
been drinking. In most cases, these deaths are the result
of
someone who was drinking and driving. Over 25,000
motor vehicle-related deaths occur each year because of
alcohol, and thousands of people are injured.
I
Just how much alcohol is too much if a person plans
to drive? Ideally, no one should drink alcohol and then
drive. But
if
one does, then what’s “too much”? It can be
1
a lot less than many might think. Although it depends on
each person and situation, here is some general.
information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Content (BAC)
of
someone who is
drinking depends upon four things:
How much alcohol is in the drink.
The drinker’s body weight.
The amount
of
food that is consumed before and
during drinking.
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-pound (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles
of
beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC
of
about
0.06
percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce
(120
ml) glasses
of
wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml)
of
a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
It’s the amount
of
alcohol that counts. For example,
if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or
90
ml
of
liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
168
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or during drinking will have a
slightly lower BAC level.
OF
DRINKS
NUMBER
(as
in
piclure)
4
r
1
I
3
HOURS
I
-
?
HOURS
100 120 140
160
180
200
220
240
BODY
WEIQHT
IN POUNDS
The law in most
U.S.
states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of
0.10
percent. In Canada the limit is 0.08 percent, and
in some other countries it’s lower than that. The BAC
will be over 0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one
hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it depends on how
much alcohol is in the drinks, and how quickly the
person drinks them.
But it’s very important to keep in mind that the ability to
drive is affected well below a BAC
of
0.10
percent.
Research shows that the driving skills
of
many people
are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05
percent, and
that the effects are worse at night. All drivers are
impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics
show that the chance of being in an accident increases
sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05
percent or
above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06
percent (three
beers in one hour for a 180-pound or 82 kg person) has
doubled his or her chance of having an accident. At a
BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of
that driver
having an accident is six times greater; at a level of 0.15
percent, the chances are twenty-five times greater! And,
the body takes about an hour to rid itself
of
the alcohol
in one drink.
No
amount of coffee or number
of
cold
showers
will
speed that up.
“I’ll be careful” isn’t the right answer. What if there’s an
emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when a
child darts into the street?
A
person with a higher BAC
might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
-
time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time
is
about 3/4 of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part.
So
do alcohol,
drugs and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a
vehicle moving at
60
mph
(100
km/h) travels
66
feet
(20
m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,
so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And,
of
course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition
of
the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; and the condition
of
your brakes.
Most drivers treat their brakes with care.
Some,
however, overwork the braking system with poor
driving habits.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts
--
heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking
--
rather than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you
do
a lot of heavy braking.
0
Don’t “ride’’ the brakes by letting your left foot rest
lightly on the brake pedal while driving.
a==--
.
.
-.
---
1
A
CAUTION:
“Riding” your brakes can cause them to overheat
to the point
that
they won’t work well. You might
not be able to stop your vehicle
in
time to avoid
an accident.
If
you “ride” your brakes, they will
I
get
so
hot they will require
a
lot of pedal force to
slow you down. Avoid “riding” the brakes.
‘I
E:
e brakes weafs them out much faster
You
would need costly brake replacement much
sooner than normal, and
it
also
reduces fuel
If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic
following distances,
you
will eliminate a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking and
longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If
you
do, the
pedal may get harder to push down.
If
your engine
stops,
you
will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and the
brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your Buick has an advanced electronic braking system
that will help prevent skidding.
This light on the instrument panel will
go
on when you
start your vehicle.
See “Anti-lock Brake System Warning Light” in the
Index.
ANTI
LOCK
ANTI
LOCK
KK
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in
front of you.
You slam
on
the brakes. Here’s what happens with
ABS.
A
computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
The
computer separately works the brakes at each front
wheel and at the rear wheels.
You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As
you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
I
CAUTION:
Anti-lock doesn’t change
the
time you need to
get your foot
up
to the
brake pedal.
If
you get
too
close
to the vehicle in front of you, you won’t
have time to
apply
your brakes ifethat vehicle
suddenly
stows
or
stops. Always
leave
enough
room
up
ahead
to
stop,
even though you have
antblock
brakes.
To
Use
Anti-Lock:
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
and let anti-lock work for
you.
When
you
start your vehicle and begin to drive away,
you may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise. And
you may even notice that your brake pedal moves a little
while this is going on. This is the ABS system testing
itself. You may also hear this during a hard stop.
Traction Control System
(Option)
Your vehicle may have a traction control system that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful
in
slippery
road conditions. The traction control system works at
low speeds only, such as when you accelerate from a
stop. It applies brake pressure
to
an individual wheel
that the system senses is about to spin.
You may feel the system working, or you may notice
some noise, but this is normal.
TRACTION
OFF
The “TRACTION
OFF”
warning light lets you know if
your traction control system is not working. See
“Traction Control System Warning Light” in the Index.
Disc Brake Wear Indicators
Your Buick has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come
174
and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving
(except when you are pushing on the brake pedal
firmly).
I
A
CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
I
sooner or later your brakes won’t work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
I
could result
in
costly brake repair.
I
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied.
This
does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Rear Drum Brakes
Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, but if
you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear
brake linings inspected. Also, the rear brake drums
should be removed and inspected each time the tires are
removed for rotation or changing. When
you
have the
front brakes replaced, have the rear brakes inspected,
too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a moderate brake stop, your
brakes adjust for wear.
If
you rarely make a moderate or heavier stop, then your
brakes might not adjust correctly. If you drive in that
way, then
--
very carefully
--
make a few moderate
brake stops about every
1000
miles
(1
600
km),
so
your
brakes will adjust properly.
175
Braking in Emergencies
Use your anti-lock braking system when you need to.
With anti-lock, you ‘can steer and brake at the same time.
In
many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
Steering
Power Steering
If
you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops
or
the system fails
to
function, you can steer but it
.will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving
on
Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A
lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s
why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each.of
us
is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to changejts path when you
turn
the front wheels.
If
there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle
at
which the curve
is
banked, and your speed. While
you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can
control.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then
you suddenly accelerate.
Those two control systems
--
steering .and acceleration
--
can overwhelm those places where the tires meet the
road and make you lose control.
What should you do
if
this ever happens? Let up on the
.accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it
to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves
warn
that you should
adjust your speed. Of course,
the
posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If
you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust
your
speed
so
you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
176
I
When you drive into a curve at night, it’s harder to see
the road ahead of you because it bends away from the
straight beams of your lights. This is one good reason to
drive slower.
Steering in Emergencies
There are timi% when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example,
you
come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right
in
front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking
--
if
you can stop in
time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. That’s
the time for evasive action
--
steering around the
problem.
Your Buick can perform very well
in
emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. It is better to remove as
much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An
emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the
recommended
9
and
3
o’clock positions, you can
turn
it a
full
180
degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have
to
act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object. You must then be prepared to steer
back
to
your original lane and then brake to a controlled
stop.
Depending on your speed, this can be rather violent for
an unprepared driver. This is one of the reasons driving
experts recommend
that
you use your safety belts and
keep both hands on the steering wheel.
I
D
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible
is
a
good reason to practice defensive driving at
all times.
177
Off-Road Recovery
You
may find sometime that your right wheels have
dropped
off
the edge
of
a road onto the shoulder while
you’re driving.
If the level
of
the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so
that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up
to
1/4
turn until the
right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn
your steering wheel to
go
straight down the roadway.
If
the shoulder appears to be about four inches
(100
mm) or more below
the
pavement, this difference
can cause problems.
If
there is not enough room to pull
entirely onto the shoulder and stop, then follow the same
procedures. But
if
the right front tire scrubs against the
side
of
the pavement, do NOT steer more sharply. With
too much steering angle, the vehicle may jump back
onto the road with
so
much steering input that it crosses
over into the oncoming traffic before you can bring it
back under control.
Instead, ease off again on the accelerator and steering
input, straddle
the
pavement once more, then try again.
Passing
The driver
of
a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back
into
the right lane again.
A
simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds.
A
miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst
of
all traffic accidents
--
the
head-on collision.
178
So
here are some tips for passing:
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road,
to
the sides, and
to
crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns.
If
you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a better
time.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A
broken center line usually indicates it’s all right to
pass (providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross
a solid line
on
your side of the lane or a double solid
line, even if the road seems empty of approaching
traffic.
If you suspect that the driver
of
the vehicle you want
to pass isn’t aware of your presence, tap the
horn
a
couple of times before passing.
Do
not
get too close to the vehicle you want to pass
while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
following
too
closely reduces your area of vision,
especially if you’re following
a
larger vehicle. Also,
you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead
suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a reasonable
distance.
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t
get too close. Time your move
so
you will be
increasing speed as
the
time comes to move into
the
other lane.
If
the way is clear to pass, you will have
a
“running start’’ that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
If other cars are lined
up
to pass a
slow
vehicle, wait
your turn.
But
take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the
blind spot.
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your
left
lane change signal before moving out
of
the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle
to
see
its
front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror
is
convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really
is.)
0
0
0
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next
vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lights are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
If you’re being passed, make it easy for
the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
Loss
of
Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the
tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your Buick’s
three control systems. In the braking skid your wheels
aren’t rolling. In
the
steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot
off
the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide (as when
you
turn a corner
on a wet, snow- or ice-covered road), ease your foot off
the accelerator pedal as soon as you feel the vehicle start
to slide. Quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to
go. If
you
start steering quickly enough, your vehicle
will straighten
out.
As
it does, straighten the front
wheels.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important
to
slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid.sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower
gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues
--
such as enough water, ice or packed snow on the road to
make a “mirrored surface”
--
and slow down when
you
have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock braking system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid. Steer the way
you
want to
go-
Driving
at
Night
...,.
..
-
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One
reason
is
that some drivers are likely to be impaired
--
by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
0
0
0
c
0
0
0
Drive defensively. Remember, this is the most
dangerous time.
Don’t drink and drive. (See “Drunken Driving” in
the Index for more on this problem.)
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlights behind you.
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow
down and keep more space between you and other
vehicles. It’s hard
to
tell
how fast the vehicle ahead
.
is going just by looking at its taillights.
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlights can light up only
so
much road ahead.
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place and
rest.
Night Vision
No
one
can
see
as
well at night as
in
the daytime. But as
we
get older these differences increase.
A
50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example,
if
you spend the day
in
bright
sunshine
you
are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will
have less trouble adjusting to night.
But if you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night.
They may cut down
on
glare from headlights, but they
also
make a lot
of
things invisible that should remain
visible
-
such as parked cars, obstacles, pedestrians, or
even trains blocking railway crossings. You may want to
put on your sunglasses after you have pulled into a
brightly-lighted service
or
refreshment area. Eyes
shielded from that glare may adjust more quickly to
darkness back
on
the road. But be sure to remove your
sunglasses before you leave the service area.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching lights. It
can take
a
second or two, or even several seconds, for
your eyes to readjust
to
the dark. When you are faced
with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn’t lower
the
high beams, or a vehicle
with
misaimed headlights),
slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the
approaching lights. If there is a line of opposing traffic,
make occasional glances over the line of headlights to
make certain that one
of
the vehicles isn’t starting to
move into your lane. Once
you
are past the bright lights,
give your eyes time to readjust before resuming speed.
High
Beams
If the vehicle approaching you has its high beams on,
signal by flicking yours to high and then back to low
beam. This is the usual signal to lower the headlight
beams. If the other driver still doesn’t lower the beams,
resist the temptation to put your high beams
on.
This
only makes two half-blinded drivers.
On a freeway, use your high beams
only
in
remote areas
where you won’t impair approaching drivers. In some
places, like cities, using high beams is illegal.
When you follow another vehicle on a freeway or
highway, use low beams. True, most vehicles now have
day-night mirrors that enable the driver to reduce glare.
But outside mirrors are not of this type and high beams
from behind can bother the driver ahead.
A
Few More Night Driving Suggestions
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean
--
inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Tobacco smoke also
makes inside glass surfaces very filmy and
can
be
a
vision hazard if it’s left there.
Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and
flash
more than
clean glass would, making the pupils of your eyes
contract repeatedly. You might even want to keep a cloth
and some glass cleaner in your vehicle if you need to
clean your glass frequently.
Remember that your headlights light up far less of
a
roadway when
you
are in a turn or curve.
Driving in
the
Rain
Keep your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick
out
dimly lighted objects.
Just as your headlights should be checked regularly for
proper aim,
so
should your eyes be examined regularly.
Some drivers suffer from night blindness
--
the inability
to see in dim light
--
and aren’t even aware
of
it.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction.
It’s always wise to go slower and be cautious
if
rain
starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may get
wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned
for
driving
on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder
it
is to see. Even
if
your
windshield wiper blades are
in
good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings,
the
edge of the road, and even
people walking. Road spray can often be worse for
vision than rain, especially
if
it comes from a dirty road.
So
it is wise to keep your wiping equipment
in
good
shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled.
Replace your windshield wiper inserts when
they
show
signs
of
streaking
or
missing areas on the windshield, or
when strips of rubber
start
to separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles
or
even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But
if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.
A
CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t
work well in a quick stop and may cause pulling
to one side. You could lose control
of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle
of
water or a
car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous.
So
much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
You might
not
be aware
of
hydroplaning. You could
drive along for some time without realizing your tires
aren’t in constant contact with the road. You could find
out the hard way: when you have to slow, turn, move out
to pass
--
or if you get hit by a gust of wind. You could
suddenly find yourself out
of
control.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But
it
can
if
your
tires haven’t much tread
or
if the pressure in one or more
is low.
It
can happen
if
a lot
of
water is standing on the
road.
If
you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles, or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a’hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when it
is
raining, and be
careful.
Some
Other Rainy Weather Tips
0
0
0
0
0
Turn on your headlights
--
not just your parking lights
--
to help make you more visible
to
others.
Look
for hard-to-see vehicles coming from behind..
You may want
to
use your headlights even in daytime
if it’s raining hard.
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and
be
prepared to have
your
view restricted
by road spray.
If
the road spray is
so
heavy you are
actually blinded, drop back. Don’t pass until
conditions improve. Going more slowly is better than
having an accident.
Use your defogger
if
it helps.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” in the Index.)
.,
Driving
in
Fog,
Mist and
Haze
r
Fog can occur with high humidity or heavy frost. It can
be
so
mild that you can see through
it
for several
hundred feet (meters). Or it might be
so
thick that you
can
see
only
a
few feet (meters) ahead. It may come
suddenly to an otherwise clear road. And it can be
a
major hazard.
When you drive into a fog patch, your visibility will be
reduced quickly. The biggest dangers are striking the
vehicle ahead or being struck by the one behind. Try to
"read" the fog density down the road.
If
the
vehicle
ahead starts
to
become less clear or, at night, if the
taillights are harder
to
see, the fog is probably
thickening. Slow down
to
give traffic behind you a
chance to slow down. Everybody then has a better
chance to avoid hitting the vehicle ahead.
A
patch
of
dense fog may extend only for a few feet
(meters) or for miles (kilometers); you can't really tell
while you're
in
it.
You can only treat the situation with
extreme care.
One common
fog
condition
--
sometimes called mist or
ground fog
--
can happen in weather that seems perfect,
especially at night or in the early morning in valley and
low, marshy areas. You can be suddenly enveloped in
thick, wet haze that may even coat your windshield. You
can often spot these fog patches or mist layers with your
headlights. But sometimes they can be waiting for you
as
you come over a
hill
or dip
into
a shallow valley.
Start
your
windshield wipers and washer, to help clear
accumulated road dirt. Slow down carefully.
Tips on Driving
in
Fog
If you get caught
in
fog, turn your headlights
on
low
beam, even
in
daytime. You’ll see
--
and be seen
--
better.
Don’t
use
your high beams.
The
light will bounce
off
the water droplets that make up fog and reflect back at
you.
Use your defogger. In high humidity, even a light
buildup of moisture on the inside of the glass will cut
down on your already limited visibility.
Run
your
windshield wipers and washer occasionally. Moisture
can build up on the outside glass, and what seems to be
fog may actually be moisture
on
the outside of your
windshield.
Treat dense fog as an emergency. Try to find a place
IO
pull off
the
road. Of course
you
want to respect
another’s property, but you might need
to
put something
between you and moving vehicles
--
space, trees,
telephone poles, a private driveway, anything that
removes
you
from other traffic.
If visibility is near zero and
you
must stop but are
unsure whether you are away from the road, turn your
lights on, start your hazard warning flashers, and sound
your horn at intervals or when you hear approaching
traffic.
Pass other vehicles in fog only if you
can
see far enough
ahead to pass safely. Even then, be prepared to delay
your pass if you suspect the fog is worse up ahead.
If
other vehicles try to pass you, make it easy for them.
City
Driving
L
One of the biggest problems with city streets
is
the
amount
of
traffic
on
them. You’ll want to watch
out
for
what
the
other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
187
Here are ways tohcrease your safety in city driving:
0
0
0
0
0
Know the best way to get to where
you
are going.
Try not to drive around trying to pick out a familiar
street or landmark. Get a city map and plan your trip
into an unknown part of the city just as you would
for
a
cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You'll save time and energy. (See the
next section, "Freeway Driving.")
Treat a green light as
a
warning signal.
A
traffic light
is there because the corner is busy enough to need it.
When a light turns green, and just before you start to
move, check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running the red
light.
Obey all posted speed limits. But remember that they
are for ideal road, weather and visibility conditions.
You
may need to drive below the posted limit in bad
weather or when visibility is especially poor.
Pull
to
the right (with care) and stop clear
of
intersections when
you
see or hear emergency
vehicles.
Freeway
Driving
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways)
are the safest
of
all roads. But they have their own
special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most
of
the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
Entering the Freeway
At the entrance there is usually a ramp mat leads to the
freeway.
If
you have a clear view
of
the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to. determine where you expect to
blend with the flow.
If
traffic is light, you may have no
problem. But if it is heavy, find a gap as you move along
the entering lane and time your approach. Try to merge
into the gap at,close to the prevailing speed. Switch on
your
turn
signal, check your rearview mirrors as you
move along, and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffi.c flow.
Driving on the Freeway
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want to ‘pass. If you are on a
two-lane freeway, treat the right Lane as the slow lane
and the left lane as the passing lane.
If you are on a three-lane freeway, treat the right lane as
the slower-speed through lane, the middle lane as the
higher-speed through lane, and
the
left lane as
the
passing lane.
Before changing lanes, check your rearview mirrors.
Then use your turn signal.
Just before
you
leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.
If
you are moving from an outside.to a center lane on a
freeway having more than two lanes, make sure another
vehicle isn’t about to move into the same spot. Look at
the vehicles two lanes over and watch for telltale signs:
turn signals flashing,
an
increase
in
speed, or moving
toward the edge of the lane. Be prepared to delay your
move.
.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
Leaving the Freeway
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper
lane well in advance. Dashing across lanes at the last
minute is dangerous.
If
you miss your exit do not, under
any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to the
next exit.
At
each.exit point is a’deceleration lane. Ideally
it
should be long enough for you to enter it at freeway
speed (after signaling, of course) and then do your
braking before moving onto the exit ramp.
Unfortunately, not all deceleration
lanes
are long enough
--
some are too short for all the braking. Decide when to
start braking. If you must brake on the through lane, and
if there is traffic close behind
you,
you can allow a little
extra time and flash your brake lights (in addition to
your turn signal) as extra warning that you are about to
slow down and exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense of
motion. After driving for any distance at higher speeds,
you may tend
to
think
you
are going slower than you
actually are. For example,
40
mph
(65
km/h) might
seem like only
20
mph
(30
km/h). Obviously, this could
lead to serious trouble on a ramp designed for
20
mph
(30
km/h)!
Driving a Long Distance
Although most long trips today are made on freeways,
there are still many made on regular highways.
Long-distance driving on freeways and regular
highways
is
the same in some ways. The trip has to be
planned and
the
vehicle prepared, you drive at
higher-than-city speeds, and there are longer turns
behind the wheel. You’ll enjoy your trip more
if
you and
your vehicle are in good shape. Here are some tips for a
successful long trip.
Before Leaving on
a
Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If
you
must start when you’re not fresh
--
such as after a day’s
work
--
don’t plan to make
too
many miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you
can easily drive
in.
Is
your vehicle ready for a long trip?
If
you
keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
Buick dealerships all across North America. They’ll be
ready and willing to help if
you
need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
0
Wiper Blades: Are they
in
good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have
you
checked
Lights: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
all levels?
trouble-free trip. Is
the
tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system?
Maps:
Do
you have up-to-date maps?
On
the
Road
Unless you are the only driver, it is good to share the
driving task with others. Limit turns behind the wheel to
about
100
miles
(160
km) or two hours at a sitting.
Then, either change drivers or stop for some refreshment
like coffee, tea or soft drinks and some limbering up.
But do stop and move around. Eat lightly along the way.
Heavier meals tend to make some people sleepy.
On two-lane highways or undivided multilane highways
that do not have controlled access, you’ll want
to
watch
for some situations
not
usually found on freeways.
Examples are: stop signs and signals, shopping centers
with direct access to
the
highway, no passing zones and
school zones, vehicles turning left and right off the road,
pedestrians, cyclists, parked vehicles, and even animals.
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as “highway
hypnosis”? Or is
it
just plain falling asleep at the wheel?
Call
it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or
whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with
the
hum of the tires on
the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it
happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the
road
in
less than a second, and you could crash and be
injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
191
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some
of
the
slowing down. Don’t make your brakes do
it
all.
Shift to
a
lower gear when you go down a steep or
long hill. That way, you will slow down without
excessive use
of
your brakes.
CAUTION:
If
you
don’t
shift
down,
your
brakes
could
get
so
hot that they
wouldn’t
work
well.
You
would
then
have
poor
braking
or
even
none
going
down
a
hill.
You
could
crash.
Sh‘rft
down
to
let
your
mgilne
assist
your
brakes
on
a
steep
downhill
slope.
I
I
IA
I
Coastlng
downhill
On
“N
(Neutral)
or
with
the
ignltbn
off
5s
dangerous.
Your
brakes
will
have
to
do
all
the
work
of
slowing
down.
They
touid
get
so
hot that
they
woufdn’t
work
well.
You
could
crash.
Always
have
your
engine
running
and
your
vehicle
in
gear
when
you
go
dawnhill,
I
Know how to go uphill. Shift down to
“D’
(Drive).
This
will
help cool your engine and transaxle, and
you can climb the hill better.
0
Stay in your own lane when driving
on
two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay
in
your own lane. That way, you won’t be
surprised by a vehicle coming toward you in the
same lane.
It takes longer to pass another vehicle when you’re
going uphill. You’ll want to leave extra room to pass.
If a vehicle is passing you and doesn’t have enough
room, slow down to make it easier for the other
vehicle to get by.
As
you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could
be something
in
your lane, like a stalled car or an
accident.
You may see highway signs
on
mountains that warn
of
special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area, or
winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate
action.
0
Winter driving can present special problems. See
“Winter Driving”
in
the Index.
193
Parking
on
Hills
I
You
can turn your front wheels to keep your vehicle
from rolling downhill or out into traffic.
Here’s
how:
Parking Downhill
Hills and mountains mean spectacular scenery. But
please be careful where
you
stop
if
you decide
to
look at
the view
or
take pictures.
Look
for pull-offs or parking
areas provided for scenic viewing.
Another part of this manual tells how
to
use your
parking brake
(see
“Parking Brake” in the Index). But
on
a
mountain or steep hill, you can
do
one more thing.
Turn
your
wheels to the right.
You
don’t have
to
jam your tires against
the
curb, if
there is a curb.
A
gentle contact
is
all
you
need.
694
Parking Uphill
If there is a curb,
turn
your wheels
to
the left
if
the curb
is at the right side
of
your vehicle.
If
you’re
going
uphill on a one-way street and you’re
parking on the left side, your wheels should point to the
right.
If
there is no curb when you’re parking uphill, turn the
wheels to the right.
If
there is no curb when you’re parking uphill on the left
side of
a
one-way street, your wheels should be turned
to
the
left.
Torque Lock (Automatic Transaxle)
If
you
are parking on a hill and
you
don’t shift your
transaxle into
“P”
(Park) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out
of
“F‘”
(Park). This is called “torque lock.”
To
prevent torque lock, always be sure
to
shift into “P”
(Park) properly before
you
leave the driver’s seat. To
find out how, see “Shifting Into ‘P’ (Park)” in the Index.
When
you
are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
“P”
(Park)
BEFORE
you
release the parking brake.
If “torque lock” does occur,
you
may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of
the
pressure from
the
transaxle,
so
you
can pull the shift
lever out of “P” (Park).
Winter Driving
You
may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
0
Have your Buick in good shape for winter. Be sure
your engine coolant mix
is
correct.
Snow tires can help in loose snow, but they may give
you less traction on ice than regular tires.
If
you
do
not expect to be driving
in
deep snow, but may have
to travel over ice, you may not want to switch to
snow tires at all.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of
windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight,
a
red cloth, and a
.
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will
be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag
of
sand, a piece
of
old carpet or a couple
of
burlap bags
to
help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items
in
your vehicle.
197
Driving
on
Snow or
Ice
Most
of
the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between
your
tires and
the road,
you
can have a very slippery situation.
You’ll
have
a
lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be very
careful.
c
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can be
even more trouble because
it
may offer the least traction
of
all. You can get “wet ice” when
it’s
about freezing
(32°F;
0°C)
and freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid
driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
Whatever the condition
--
smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow
--
drive with caution. Accelerate gently.
Try
not
to
break
the
fragile traction. If you accelerate
too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your ability to make a
hard stop on a slippery road. Even though
you
have
the
anti-lock braking system, you’ll want to begin stopping
sooner than you would on dry pavement. See
“Anti-lock” in the Index.
Allow greater following distance
on
any slippery
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until
you
hit
a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear
in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may
remain icy
when
the surrounding roads are clear. If
you see a patch of ice ahead
of
you, brake before you
are on
it.
Try not
to
brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
road.
If
You're Caught in a Blizzard
J
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe: Turn on your hazard flashers. Tie a red
cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you've been
stopped by the snow. Put on extra clothing or wrap a
blanket around you. If you have no blankets or extra
clothing, make body insulators from newspapers, burlap
bags, rags, floor mats
--
anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
A
CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly
CO
(carbon monoxide)
gas
to
get inside.
CO
could
overcome you and
kill
you. You can’t
see
it
or
smell
it,
so
you might
not
know
it
is
in
your vehicle. Clear away snow
from around the base of your vehicle, especially
any that
is
blocking your exhaust pipe.
And
check around again from time to time to be sure
snow doesn’t collect there.
Open
a
window
just
a
little
on
the side
of
the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help
keep
CO
out.
CAUTION: (Continued)
LCAUTION:
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery
to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later
on
with your headlights. Let the heater run for awhile.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when
you
feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour
or
so
until help comes.
If
You’re Stuck
in
Deep
Snow
This manual explains how to get the vehicle out of deep
snow without damaging it. See “Rocking Your Vehicle”
in the Index.
Towing a Trailer
1
A
CAUTION:
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer
is
too heavy, the
brakes may not work well
--
or even at all. You
and your passengers could be seriously injured.
Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the
steps
in
this
section.
Pulling
a
trailer improperly
can
damage your
vehicle
and
result
in
costly repairs
not
cover
by your warranty.
To
pull
the advice
in
this
section
Your car can tow a trailer.
To
identify what the vehicle
trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should read
the information in “Weight
of
the Trailer” that appears
later in this section. But trailering is different than just
driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes
in handling, durability, and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
That’s the reason for this section, In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many
of
these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers.
So
please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
201
Load-pulling components such as
the
engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies, and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag
of
the added weight. The engine
is
required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under
greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more, the
trailer adds considerably
to
wind resistance, increasing
the pulling requirements.
All of that means changes in:
Handling
Durability
You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first
500
miles
(800
km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first
500
miles
(800
km) that
you
tow
a trailer, don’t drive over
50
mph
(80
km/h) and
don’t make starts at
full
throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
Fuel
economy
If
You
Do
Decide To
Pull
A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points.
There are many different laws having to do with
trailering. Make sure your rig will be legal,
not
only
where you live but also where you’ll be driving.
A
good source for this information can be state or
provincial police.
Consider using a sway control
if
your trailer will
weigh
2,000
pounds
(900
kg) or less.
You
should
always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh
more than
2,000
pounds
(900
kg).
Weight
of
the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than
1,000
pounds
(450
kg),
unless you have the optional
3,000
pound
(1
350
kg)
trailer towing package. But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a
trailer are all important. And, it can also depend
on
any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at
Buick Motor Division
Customer Assistance Center
902
E.
Hamilton Avenue
Flint,
MI
48550.
In Canada, write to
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Center
1908
Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario
L1H
8P7.
Weight
of
the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total capacity
weight of your vehicle. The capacity weight includes the
curb weight
of
the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in
it, and the people who will be riding
in
the vehicle. And
if
you
will tow a trailer, you must subtract the tongue
load from your vehicle’s capacity weight because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
If you’re using a “dead-weight” hitch, the trailer tongue
(A) should weigh
10%
of
the total loaded trailer weight
(B). If you have a “weight-distributing” hitch, the trailer
tongue
(A)
should weigh
12%
of
the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around
in
the trailer.
203
Total Weight on
Your
Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the limit for
cold tires.
You’ll
find these numbers on the Certification
label at the rear edge of the driver’s door (or see “Tire
Loading” in the Index). Then be sure you don’t go over
the
GVW
limit for your vehicle.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and rough roads are
a
few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
0
0
If
you’ll
be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than
2,000
pounds
(900
kg), be sure to
use a properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch
and sway control
of
the proper size. This equipment
is very important for proper vehicle loading and
good handling
when
you’re driving.
Will
you
have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do,
then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove
the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your
vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index). Dirt
and water can, too.
0
The bumpers
on
your vehicle are not intended for
hitches.
Do
not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use only
a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the
bumper.
Safety Chains
You
should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer
so
that the tongue will not drop to
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about
safety
chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for
attaching safety chains. Always leave
just
enough slack
so
you can turn with your rig. And, never allow safety
chains to drag on
the
ground.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than
1,000
pounds
(450
kg)
loaded, then
it
needs its own brakes
--
and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
the trailer brakes
so
you’ll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly. Because you have anti-lock
brakes, do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake
system.
If
you do, both brake systems won’t work well,
or at all.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting
out
for the open road, you’ll want to get
to
know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle
you
are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly
so
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform,
safety chains, electrical connector, lights, tires and
mirror adjustment.
If
the trailer has electric brakes, start
your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the
trailer brake controller by hand
to
be sure the brakes are
working. This lets you check your electrical connection
at the same time.
Passing
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lights and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing
Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer
to
the left, just move that hand
to the
left.
To
move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
Making Turns
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this
so
your trailer won’t strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well
in
advance.
lbrn Signals When Towing
a
Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have a
different turn signal flasher and extra wiring. The green
arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lights will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green arrows
on
your
instrument panel will flash for turns even
if
the bulbs on
the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Your vehicle has bulb warning lights. When you plug
trailer lights into your vehicle’s lighting system, its bulb
warning lights may not
let
you know
if
one
of
your
lights goes
out.
So,
when you have trailer lights plugged
in, be sure
to
check your vehicle and trailer lights from
time to time to be sure they’re-all working. Once
you
disconnect the trailer lights, the bulb warning lights
again can
tell
you
if
one
of
your vehicle lights is out.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift
to
a lower gear
before
you start
down a long
or
steep downgrade.
If
you
don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes
so
much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down to
“D
or
3”
(Drive)
and reduce your speed to around
45
mph
(70
km/h)
to
reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle
overheating.
Parking on
Hills
You really should not park your vehicle, with
a
trailer
attached,
on
a hill.
If
something goes wrong, your rig
could start to move. People can be injured, and both
your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.
But
if
you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1.
Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
“F’”
(Park) yet.
2.
Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3.
When
the
wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4.
Reapply
the
regular brakes. Then apply your parking
brake, and
then
shift to
“P’
(Park).
5.
Release
the
regular brakes.
When
You
Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on
a
Hill
1.
Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Start your engine;
0
Shift into a gear; and
0
Release the parking brake.
2.
Let up on the brake pedal.
3.
Drive slowly
until
the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4.
Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, belt, cooling system, and brake adjustment.
Each
of
these is covered
in
this manual, and the Index
will help
you
find them quickly.
If
you’re trailering, it’s
a good idea to review these sections before
you
start
your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are
tight.
@
Part
5
Problems
on
the Road
=I
i
~~
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road
.
Part
5
includes:
Hazard Warning Flashers
............................................................
210
OtherWarningDevices
.............................................................
211
“Jump”Starting
....................................................................
212
TowingYourBuick
................................................................
217
Engineoverheating
................................................................
221
IfaTireGoesFlat
.................................................................
228
ChangingaFlatTire
................................................................
229
CompactSpareTire
................................................................
237
If You’re Stuck
in
Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
..............................................
239
209
......
c-~
~
,
>.,
:,
,
,
.
..,
Press the button in to make your front and rear turn
signal lights flash on and off.
Your
hazard flashers work no matter what position your
key is
in,
and even
if
the key isn't in.
To
turn off the flashers, pull out on the collar. When the
hazard flashers are on, your turn signals won't work.
Other Warning Devices
If
you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side
of
the road about
300
feet
(100
m)
behind your
vehicle.
211
Jump
Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
Buick. But please follow the steps below to do it safely.
A
CAUTION:
Batteries can
hurt
you. They can be dangerous
because:
They contain acid that can burn you.
They contain
ass
that can explode or
They contain enough electricity
to
burn
If
you don’t follow these steps exactlp,
all
of
these things can hurt you.
ignite.
you.
damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t
be
covered
by your warranty.
Trying
to
start your Buick by pushing
or
pulling
it
won’t work, and
it
could damage your vehicle.
To
Jump
Start
Your
Buick:
1.
Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
2.
Get the vehicles close enough
so
the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are,
it
could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able
to
start your Buick, and
the
bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
I
A
CAUTION:
You could be injured
if
the vehicles roll. Set the
parking brake firmly on each vehicle. Put an
automatic transaxle
in
“P” (Park) or a manual
transaxle
in
“N” (Neutral).
3.
Turn
off
the ignition
on
both vehicles. Turn
off
all
lights that aren’t needed, and radios. This will avoid
sparks and help save both batteries. And it could
save your radio!
A
CAUTION:
An
electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing anA
tools
away from any underhood
electric fan
1
NOTICE:
3
If
you leave your ram0
or
’t
could be baaly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered b)
your warranty.
Find the positive
(+)
and negative
(-)
terminals on eact
battery.
4.
Open the hoods and locate
the
batteries.
213
A
CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this,
and
some have
been
blinded. Use
a
flashlight
if
you
need more light.
Be
sure the battery has enoug,h
water.
You
don’t
need to add water
to
the Delco Freedom@
battery
installed
in’
every new
GM
vehicle.
But
if
a
battery
has filler caps,
be
sure the right amount
of
fluid
is
there. If
it
is
low,
add water to’ take care
of
that
first
If
you
don’tt, explosive gas could be present.
Battery
fluid
contains acid that
can
burn
you.
Don’t get
it
on you.
If
you accidentally get
it
in
your
eyes or on
your
skin,
flush
the place with
water and
get
medical help immediately.
5.
Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose
or
missing insulation.
If
they do,
you
could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged, too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
th.ings
you
should know. Positive
(+)
will go to
positive
(+)
a~d
mgative
(-)
will go to negative
(-)
or
a metal engine part. Don’t connect
(+)
to
(-)
or
you’ll
get a short that would damage the battery and maybe
other parts,
too.
‘
A
CAUTION:
Fans
or other
moving
engine
parts
can
injure
you
badly.
Keep your hands away from moving
parts
once the engines are running.
214
6.
Connect the red
positive
(+)
cable
to
the positive
(+)
terminal
of
the
vehicle with the
dead battery. Use a
remote positive
(+)
terminal
if
the
vehicle has one.
7.
Don’t let the other
end touch metal.
Connect
it
to
the
positive
(+)
terminal
of
the
good battery. Use a
remote positive
(+)
terminal
if
the
vehicle has one.
8.
Now
connect the
black negative
(-)
cable to the good
battery’s negative
(-)
terminal.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end
of
the negative cable doesn’t
go
to the dead battery. It goes to
a
heavy unpainted
metal part on the engine
of
the vehicle with the dead
battery.
c
9.
Attach the cable at
least
18
inches
(45
cm) away from the
dead battery, but
not near engine
parts that move.
The elecbical
connection is just as
good there, but the
chance of sparks
getting back to the
battery is much
less.
12.
Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent
electrical shorting. Take care that they don't touch
each other or any other metal.
10.
Now
start
the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
.
11.
Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.
If it won't
start
after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Towing
Your
Car
Try to have a
GM
dealer or a professional towing
service tow your Buick
.
The usual towing equipment is
a sling-type
(A)
or a wheel
lift
(B) or car carrier
(C)
tow
truck.
If
your vehicle has been changed or modified since it
was factory-new by adding aftermarket items like fog
lamps, aero skirting, or special tires and wheels, these
instructions and illustrations may not be correct.
Before you do anything,
turn
on the hazard warning
flashers.
When you call, tell the towing service:
That your vehicle has front-wheel drive.
The make, model, and year of your vehicle.
Whether you can still move
the
shift lever.
If there was an accident, what was damaged.
When the towing service arrives, let the tow operator
know that this manual contains detailed towing
instructions and illustrations. The operator may want to
see them.
217
r
/r\
CAUTION:
To help avoid injury to you or others:
0
Never let passengers ride
in
a vehicle that
0
Never tow faster
than
safe or posted
0
Never get under your vehicle after
it
has
0
Always use separate safety chains
on
each
is
being towed.
speeds.
been lifted by
a
tow truck.
side when ?owing
a
vehicle.
V
t
When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition key
off.
The steering wheel should be clamped in a
straight-ahead position, with a clamping device designed
for towing service.
Do
not use the vehicle’s steering
column lock for this. The transaxle should be in Neutral
and the parking brake released.
Don’t have
your
vehicle towed on the front wheels,
unless you must.
If
the vehicle must be towed on the
front wheels, don’t go more than
55
mph
(88
kdh)
or
farther than
500
miles
(SO0
km)
or your transaxle will
be damaged. If these limits must be exceeded, then the
front wheels have to be supported on a dolly.
A
CAUTION:
A
vehicle can fall from a car carrier
if
it
isn’t
properly secured. This can cause a collision,
serious personal injury and vehicle damage. The
vehicle should be tightly secured with chains or
steel cables before it is transported.
Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps,
canvas webbing, etc.) that can be cut by sharp
edges underneath the towed vehicle.
218
Front
Towing
Hook-
JPS
Attach
"T"
hook chains
behind the front wheels into
the bottom
slots
of the
cradle rails on both sides
Position a
4"
x
4"
wood beam across the sling chains
contacting the bottom of the radiator support. Position
the lower sling crossbar just behind the rear edge of the
front bumper.
219
Rear
Towing
Hook-Ups
Attach
'7"'
hook chains to
the slots in the bottom
of
floor pan just ahead
of
the
rear wheels
on
both sides.
Position the lower sling crossbar directly under the rear
bumper. A
4"
x
4"
wood beam
is
not needed.
Attach a separate safety
chain around the outboard
end
of
each lower control
arm.
220
Engine Overheating
You will find the warning light about a hot engine on
your Buick instrument panel and if you have the
optional gage cluster,
a
coolant temperature gage.
You will also find a low coolant warning light
on
your
Buick instrument panel.
If
Steam
Is
Coming
From
Your
Engine:
A
CAUTION:
-
_earn from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even
if
you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine
if
you see or hear steam coming
..
-m
it.
Just turn
it
off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there
is
no sign of steam or coolant before
opening the hood.
If
you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in
it
can catch fire. You
or
others could be badly burned. Stop your engine
if
it
overheats, and get out of the vehicle
until
the
sngine is cool.
- -
If
No
Steam
Is
Coming
From
Your
Engine:
If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little
too
hot when you:
Climb a long
hill
on a hot day.
Stop after high speed driving.
Idle for long periods
in
traffic.
Tow
a
trailer.
221
If
you
get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or
so:
1.
Turn off your air conditioner.
2.
Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
3.
If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to “N” (Neutral).
If
you
no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just
to
be safe, drive slower for about ten minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on,
you
can drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for two or three minutes while you’re parked, to see if
the warning stops. But then, if
you
still have the
warning, TURN
OFF
THE ENGINE
AND
GET
EVERYONE OUT
OF
THE VEHICLE until it cools
down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
e
w
. ._
,
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
Coolant recovery tank
*
Radiator pressure cap
Electric engine fans
I
A
CAUTION:
An
electric fan under the hood can start up even
when the engine
is
not running and can injure
you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.
.
.”
P
The coolant level should be at or above
“FULL
COLD.”
If
it isn’t, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump
or
somewhere else
in
the cooling system.
I
I
A
CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them.
If
you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine
if
there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
I
Engine damage? Il’onl
I
mning bUrlr engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warrbllr
If
there seems to be no leak, check to see if the electric
engine fans are running. If the engine
is
overheating,
both fans should be running. If they aren’t, your vehicle
needs service.
223
How
to
Add
Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery
Tank
If
you
haven’t found a problem yet, but
the
coolant level
In
cold weather, water can free
isn’t at or above
“FULL COLD,”
add a
50/50
mixture
of clean water (preferably distilled) and the proper
antifreeze at the coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine
Coolant’’ in the Index for more information about the
proper coolant mix.)
I
A
CAUTION:
I
Adding
plain
water
to
your
cooling
system
can
be
dangerous.
Plain
water,
or
some
other
liquid
like
alcohol,
can
boll
befare
the
proper
coolant
mix
will.
Your
vehicle’s
coolant
warning
system
is
set
for
the
groper
coolant
mix.
With
plain
water
.of
the
wrung
mix,
your
engine
could
get
too
hot
but
you
wouldn’t
get
the
overheat
warning.
Your
engine
could
catch
fire
and
you
or
others
could
be
burned.
Use
a
50/50
mix
of
Glean
water
and
a
proper
antifreeze.
I
I
I
A
CAUTION:
A
CAUTION:
You
can
be
burned
if
you
spill cootant
on
hot
engine
parts.
Coolant contains ethylene
glycol
and
it
will
burn
if
the engine
parts
are
hot
enough. Don’t
spill
coolant
on a
hot
engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at or
above
“FULL
COLD,”
start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try.
You
can add the proper coolant mix
directly
to
the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is
cool before
you
do it.
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap
--
even a little
--
they can come out
at
high speed. Never turn the pressure cap when
e
cooling system, including the radiator
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system
and radiator pressure cap to cool
if
you ever
have
to
turn the pressure cap.
L
L
How
to
Add
Coolant to the Radiator
1
1.
You
can remove the
radiator pressure
cap when the
cooling system,
including the
radiator pressure
cap and upper
radiator hose,
is
no
longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly to the
left
until
it
first
stops. (Don't press
down
while turning
the
pressure
cap.)
2.
Then keep turning
the pressure cap,
but now push down
as
you
turn
it.
Remove
the
pressure cap.
1
If
you
hear a hiss, wait for that
to
stop.
A
hiss means
I
there
is
still some pressure
left.
i
3.
Fill
the radiator
with
the
proper
mix,
up to the base
of the filler neck.
4.
Then fill the coolant recovery tank to
“FULL
COLD.”
6.
Start the engine and
let it run until you
can feel the upper
radiator hose
getting hot. Watch
out for the engine
fans.
7.
By
this time
the
coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level
is
lower, add
more of the proper
mix
through the filler neck until
the level reaches the top
of
the filler neck.
5.
Put the cap back on
the
coolant recovery tank, but
leave
the
radiator pressure cap
off.
227
8.
Then replace
the
pressure cap. Be
sure the arrows
on
the
pressure cap
line up like this.
If
a
Tire
Goes
Flat
It’s
unusual
for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially
if
you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have
a
“blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what
to
do:
If a front .tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot
off
the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, then gently brake to a
stop well out
of
the traffic lane.
A
rear blowout, particularly on
a
curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use in
a
skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to
go.
It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to
a
stop, well off the road
if
possible.
If your tire goes flat, the next section shows how to use
your jacking equipment
to
change
a
flat tire safely.
Changing
a
Flat
Tire
If
a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
A
CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle
can
slip
off the jack and roll over you or other
people. You and they could be badly injured. Find
a level place to change your tire. To help prevent
the vehicle from moving:
1.
Set the parking brake firmly.
2.
Put the shift lever
in
“P” (Park).
3.
Turn off the engine.
I
To
be even more certain the vehicle won’t move,
you can
put
chocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the other side of the
vehicle, a’ *?e opposite end.
-
2.
I.
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
The
equipment
you’ll
need is
in
the trunk.
Start with the
jack
and
the
wheel
wrench.
230
The jack has a bolt at the
end. Attach the wheel
wrench to the jack bolt.
If
your
Buick has a wheel cover,
you
must take it
off
to
reach the wheel nuts. Refer to the correct picture
to
see
how to remove your wheel cover.
If
your vehicle has an aluminum wheel with a center
cover, remove
it
using the flat end
of
the wheel wrench.
Rotate the wheel wrench clockwise (to
the
right). That
will raise the lift head a little.
231
If
your vehicle has this
aluminum wheel, you
may have plastic wheel
nut
caps. Use the wheel
nut wrench to remove
the wheel nut caps and
to loosen the wheel
nuts.
If
your vehicle has wire
wheel covers, remove
them
as
follows:
3
Use the wire wheel key
wrench
to
remove the wire
I
I
wheel cover.
Put the flat end in the slot
and take the small cover
.,.
.
I
Remove the theft deterrent
wheel nut, by placing the
key end of the wire wheel
key wrench over the nut
and turning it to the left.
Pull off the wire wheel
cover. Note: When
replacing the wheel cover,
carefully line up the tire
valve stem and the notch in
the wheel cover.
I
Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove them yet. Next, attach the wheel wrench
to the bolt on the end
of
the jack. Raise the jack
a
little
by
rotating the wheel wrench clockwise (to the right).
Position the jack under the
vehicle. There is a notch in
the frame near each
of
the
wheels. Fit the top of the
jack into the notch nearest
the wheel with the flat tire.
The jack handle has markings at
8”
for the rear and
10”
for the front, which will help you to locate the jacking
notches in the frame.
1
CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it
is
jacked up is
dangerous.
If
the vehicle slips
off
the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
le when it
is
supported only by a jack.
Raise
the
vehicle
by
rotating the wheel wrencn
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough
off
the ground
so
there
is
enough room for the spare tire to fit.
Raising
your vehicle
with
the
jack
improperly
~~
Remove all the wheel nuts
and
take
off
the flat tire.
A
CAUTION:
Rust
or dirt
on
the wheel, or on the parts to
which
it
is
fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could come
off
and cause an accident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In
an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel
to do
this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later,
if
you need
to,
to get all the rust or
dirt
off.
kemove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting
urfaces or spare wheel.
CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could
.
fall off, causing a serious accident.
&:aF,;--..&
..*
I
ryr
2:.
74
&
Place the spare on the
~
.*.
..
wheel mounting surface.
Replace the wheel nuts
with the rounded end
of
the
nuts toward the wheel.
Tighten each nut
by
hand
until the wheel
is
held
lgainst the hub.
Don’t try
to
put a wheel cover on your compact spare
tire.
It
won’t fit. Store the wheel cover
in
the trunk until
you have the
flat
tire repaired or replaced.
I
NOTICE:
Now put all
the
equipment back
in
the trunk.
WHEEL
WRENCH
A
CAU
I
ION:
Storing
a
jack,
a
tire or other equilpment
in
the
passenger compartment
of
the
vehicle
could
cause
injury.
In
a
sudden stop or collision,
loose
equipment
cowtd
strike
someone.
Store
all
these
in the proper
place.
Compact Spare Tire
Although
the
compact spare was
fully
inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check
the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60
psi
(420
kPa). The compact spare is made to go up to
3,000
miles
(5000
km), so you can finish your trip and have your
full-size tire repaired
or
replaced where you want.
Of
course, it’s best to replace your spare with a full-size tire
as soon as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in
good shape
in
case
you
need
it
again.
Your anti-lock brake system warning light may come on
when
you
are driving with a compact spare. See
“Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light’’ in the Index.
237
Don't take your compact spare through an
automatic car wash with guide rails. The
compact spare can get caught on the rails. That
can damage the tire and wheel, and maybe other
Don't use your compact spare on some other vehicle.
And don't
mix
your compact spare or wheel with other
wheels or tires. They won't
fit.
Keep your spare and
its
wheel together.
Tire chains won't fit your compact
them will damage your vehicle and destroy
the
chains too. Don't use,.,,tjce:
,
,
.,,b
:"
'ix.,
chains on you
compact spare.
,.,
(,:,
,.,4'#i
,,
.
.Ai
v*:
,,
j
'2
L
/d
CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment
in
the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all thesc
in
the proper place.
238
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or
Snow
What you don’t want
to
do when your vehicle is stuck
is
to spin your wheels. The method known as “rocking” can
help
you
get out when you’re stuck, but
you
must
use
caution.
I
A
CAUTION:
If
you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode and you or others could be injured. And,
the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can
overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above
35
mph
(55
km/h) as
shown
on
the speedometer.
I
=
I
Spinning your wheels lestroy par
__
of your
vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the whe
too
fast while shifting your transaxle back
forth, you can destroy your transaxle.
Rocking your vehicle
to
get
it
out:
First, turn your steering wheel
left
and right. That
will
clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back
and forth between
“R”
(Reverse) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is
in
gear. If
that doesn’t get
you
out after
a
few tries,
you
may need
to be towed out.
If
you
do need to be towed out, see
“Towing Your Car”
in
the Index.
t
I957
Buick
Super
I
240
I
I
Here you will find information about the care of your Buick
.
This part begins with service and fuel information. and
then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels
.
There is also technical information about your
vehicle. and a section devoted to its appearance care
.
Part 6 includes:
ServiceTips
......................................................................
Engineoil
.......................................................................
242
Fuel
.............................................................................
243
Hood Release 248
251
AirFilter
.........................................................................
255
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
...........................................................
Enginecoolant
....................................................................
258
PowerSteeringFluid
...............................................................
261
Windshield Washer Fluid
............................................................
262
Brakes
...........................................................................
263
Battery
...........................................................................
265
266
268
270
278
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
..................................................
286
Fuses .and Circuit Breakers
...........................................................
287
Capacities and Specifications
..........................................................
292
.....................................................................
256
BulbReplacement
.................................................................
LoadingYourVehicle
...............................................................
Tires
............................................................................
Appearancecare
..................................................................
241
Service
Your Buick dealer
knows
your vehicle best and wants
you
to be happy with it. We hope
you’ll
go
to
your
dealer for all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM
parts and GM-trained and supported service people.
We
hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one
of
these marks:
n
U
Delco
Doing
Your
Own
Service
Work
If you want to do some
of
your own service work, you’ll
want
to
get the proper Buick Service Manual. It tells you
much more about how to service your Buick than this
manual can.
To
order
the
proper service manual, see
“Service Publications’’ in
the
Index.
You
should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date
of
any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record’’
in
the Index.
I
CAUTION:
0
You
can be injured if
you
try to
do
service work
1
on a vehicle without knowing enough about it.
0
I
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, and the proper replacement
parts
and tools before you attempt any
vehicle maintenance task.
Be sure
to
use the proper ‘nuts, bolts and
other fasteners.
“English’a
and
“metric”
fasteners can be easily confused.
If
you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break
or
fall
off.
You”cauld
be
hurt.
If
you try
to
do
your own service work
knowing enough about
it,
your vehicle!l
damaged.
I
Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at
87
octane or
higher. It should meet specifications ASTM D4814
in
the U.S. and CGSB
3.5-92
in Canada. These fuels
should have the proper additives,
so
you
should not have
to add anything to the fuel.
In the
U.S.
and Canada, it’s easy to be sure you get the
right kind
of
gasoline (unleaded). You’ll see
“UNLEADED” right
on
the pump. And only unleaded
nozzles will fit into your vehicle’s filler neck.
Be sure the posted octane is at least
87.
If the octane
is
less than
87,
you may get a heavy knocking noise when
you
drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at
87
octane or higher and
you
still hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
But don’t worry
if
you hear a little pinging noise when
you’re accelerating or driving up a
hill.
That’s normal,
and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid
of
pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means
you have
a
problem.
What about gasoline with blending materials that
contain oxygen, such as
MTBE
or alcohol?
MTBE is “methyl tertiary-butyl ether.’’ Fuel that is no
more than
15%
MTBE is fine for your vehicle.
Ethanol is ethyl or grain alcohol. Properly-blended
fuel
that
is
no more than
10%
ethanol is fine for your
vehicle.
Methanol is methyl or wood alcohol.
Fuel that
is
more than
5%
methanol is bad for
your vehicle. Don’t use it.
It
can corrode me
parts in your fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage woul
I
be covered under your warranty. And even at
5%
or less, there must be “cosolvents” and
I
I
corrosion preventers in this fuel to
these problems.
Gasolines for Cleaner Air
Your use of gasoline with detergent additives will help
prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel
system. That helps keep your engine in tune and your
emission control system working properly. It’s good for
your vehicle, and
you’ll
be doing your part for cleaner
air.
Many gasolines are now blended with materials called
oxygenates. General Motors recommends that you use
gasolines with these blending materials, such as MTBE
and ethanol.
By
doing
so,
you can help clean the air,
especially in those parts of the country that have high
carbon monoxide levels.
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now producing
reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. General Motors
recommends that you use reformulated gasoline. By
doing
so,
you can help clean the air, especially in those
parts of the country that have high ozone levels.
You should ask your service station operators if their
gasolines contain detergents and oxygenates, and
if
they
have been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions.
Fuel
If you have the Supercharged 3800
V6
(L67) engine, use
premium unleaded gasoline rated at 91 octane or higher.
It should meet specifications ASTM D4814 in the
U.S.
and CGSB 3.5-92 in Canada. These fuels should have
the proper additives,
so
you
should not have to add
anything to the fuel.
In the
U.S.
and Canada, it’s easy to be sure you get the
right kind of gasoline (unleaded). You’ll see
“UNLEADED” right on the pump. And only unleaded
nozzles will
fit
into your vehicle’s filler neck.
Be sure the posted octane is at least 9
1.
If
the octane is
less than
9
1,
you may get a heavy knocking noise when
you drive. (In an emergency,
you
may be able to use
lower octane
-
as low as 87
--
if heavy knocking does
not occur.)
If
you’re using
91
or higher octane unleaded
gas and you still get heavy knocking, your engine needs
service.
What about gasoline with blending materials that
contain oxygen, such as MTBE or alcohol?
MTBE is “methyl tertiary-butyl ether.’’ Fuel that
is
no
more than
15%
MTBE is fine for your car.
Ethanol is ethyl or grain alcohol. Properly-blended fuel
that is no more than
10%
ethanol is fine for your car.
Methanol is methyl or wood alcohol.
Fuel that
is
more than
5%
methanol
is
bad for
your vehicle. Don’t use it.
It
can corrode metal
parts in your fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your Warranty. And even at
5%
or less, there must be “cosolvents” and
corrosion preventers in this fuel to help avoid
Gasolines for Cleaner Air
Your use
of
gasoline with detergent additives will help
prevent deposits from forming
in
your engine and fuel
system. That helps keep your engine in tune and your
emission control system working properly. It’s good for
your vehicle, and you’ll be doing your part for cleaner
air.
Many gasolines are now blended with materials called
oxygenates. General Motors recommends that you use
gasolines with these blending materials, such as MTBE
and ethanol. By doing
so,
you can help clean the air,
especially
in
those parts
of
the country that have high
carbon monoxide levels.
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now producing
reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. General Motors
recommends that you use reformulated gasoline. By
doing
so,
you
can help clean the air, especially
in
those
parts of the country that have high ozone levels.
You should ask your service station operators if their
gasolines contain detergents and oxygenates, and if they
have been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
U.S.
or Canada, unleaded fuel may be hard to find.
Do
not use leaded gasoline. If
you
use
even one tankful,
your emission controls won’t work well or at all. With
continuous use, spark plugs can get fouled,
the
exhaust
system can corrode, and your engine oil can deteriorate
quickly. Your vehicle’s oxygen sensor will be damaged.
All
of
that means costly repairs that wouldn’t be covered
by your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business
in
the
country where
you’ll
be driving.
245
You can also write us at the following address for
advice. Just tell us where you're going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).
General Motors of Canada Ltd.
International Export Sales
P.O.
Box
828
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 7N1, Canada
Filling
Your
Tank
The cap is behind
a
hinged door
on
the left side
of
your
vehicle.
A
r
PUTION:
Gasoline vapor
is
highly
flammable.
I?
burns
violently,
and
that
can
cause
very
bad
injuries.
Don't
smoke
if
you're
near
gasoline
or
refueling
your
vehicle.
Keep
sparks,
flames, and
smoking
materials
away
from
gasoline.
.
.
....
i
The release button
is
to the
left
of
the steering column.
I
Or
you
can
use
the
release lever
in
the
trunk.
I
247
A
CAUTION:
If
you
get
gasoline
on
you
and
then
something
ignites
it,
YOU
could
be
badly
burned.
Gasoline
can
spray
out
on
you
if
you
open
the
fuel
filler
cap
too
quickly.
This
spray
can
happen
if
your
tank
is
nearly
full,
and
is
more
likely
in
hot
weather. Open the
fuel
filler
cap
slowly
and
wait
I
’
for
any “hlss”
noise
to
stop. Then
unscrew
the
cap
all
the
way.
I
When you put the cap back on, turn it to
the
right until
you
hear
a
clicking
noise,
4
&
OTICE:
you neea
a
new
cap,
be sure
IO
get tne rlght
type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If
you get
the wrong type,
it
may not fit or have proper
venting, and your fuel tank and emissions
system might be damaged.
Checking Things Under the
Hood
Hood
Release
To
open the hood, first pull
the handle inside the
vehicle.
It
is located on the
lower left side
of
the
instrument panel. When
you
pull this handle, the
hood lock will open.
3
AQ
Then
go
to
the front
of
the vehicle and release
the
secondary hood release. It
is
under the front edge
of
the
grille.
L
A
CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
I
underhood electric fan.
I
A
CAUTION:
1
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber.
You
or others
could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto
a
hot engine.
--
I
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on
properly. Then just pull the hood down and close it
firmly.
3800
V6
Supercharged Engine
Your Park Avenue Ultra has a
3800
V6
Supercharged
engine. Buick chose supercharging rather than
turbocharging because Buick emphasizes smooth,
refined power.
The Supercharger is a device which is designed
to
pump
more air into the engine than it would normally use.
This air mixed with fuel, creates increased engine
power. Since the Supercharger is a pump and
is
driven
from an engine accessory drive belt, increased pressure
is available at all driving conditions.
250
The powertrain control module
(PCM),
works with a
vacuum control to regulate the increased pressure
required during specific driving conditions. When this
increased pressure or boost, is not desired such as during
idling and light throttle cruising, the excess air that the
Supercharger is pumping is routed through a bypass. All
of these controls, working together provide high
performance character and fuel efficiency in the
3800
V6
Supercharged Buick engine.
The power steering pump uses a remote reservoir
mounted on the throttle and cruise control cable bracket.
See “Maintenance Schedule’’ in the Index for when you
should check the fluid.
The supercharged
3800
engine uses two accessory drive
belts. One belt drives the generator and the power
steering pump. The second belt drives the supercharger,
coolant pump and air conditioning compressor. Each
belt has
its
own tensioner and idler pulley. See
“Maintenance Schedule’’ in the Index for when you
should check the accessory drive belts and supercharger
oil level. Have your dealer check the oil level in the
supercharger.
Engine
Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick is
directly behind the engine
fan. Turn
off
the engine and
give the oil a few minutes
to get back down into the
oil pan. If you don’t, the oil
dipstick might not &ow the
actual level.
To
Check Engine Oil:
Pull out the dipstick and
clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back
in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip
lower.
I
i
When
to
Add
Oil:
If the oil is at or below the
ADD
line you’ll need to add some oil. But you must use the
right kind. This section explains what kind of oil to use.
For crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and
Specifications”in the Index.
I
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much
oil.
If
your engine has
so
much
oil
that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper
operating range, your engine could be damaged,
Use
the engine oil fill cap
next
to
the oil dipstick
to
add
oil.
Just
fill
it enough,to put the level somewhere
in
the
proper operating range. Push the-dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
252
What
Kind
of
Oil
to
Use:
Look
for
three things:
SG
“SG”
must be on the oil container, either by itself or
combined with other quality designations, such as
“SG/CC,” “SG/CD,” “SF,SG,CC,” etc. These letters
show
American Petroleum Institute (API) levels
of
quality.
If
you use oils that don’t have the “SG”
designation,
you
can cause engine damage not
I
covered
by
your warranty.
I
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE
OILS
FOR
BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST
SAE VISCOSITY GRADE
OIL
FOR
THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE.
HOT
WEATHER
-
-
SAE 5W-30
LOOK
FOR
THIS
LABEL
SAE 1OW-30
PREFERRED
above
0°F
(-18%)
COLD
WEATHER
IF
NEITHER SAE 5W-30 NOR SAE 1OW-30
GRADE
OILS
ARE AVAILABLE, SAE 30
GRADE MAY BE USED AT TEMPERATURES
ABOVE 40 DEGREES
F
(4 DEGREES C).
ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
DO NOT USE SAE 1OW-40, SAE 2OW-50
OR
0
SAE low-30
As shown in this chart, SAE 1OW-30 is best for your
vehicle. However, you can use
SAE
5W-30 if it’s
going to be colder than
60
OF
(1
6
”
C) before your
next oil change. When it’s very cold, below
0°F
(-
18
”
C), you should
use
SAE 5W-30.
These numbers on an oil container show
its
viscosity, or
thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE
low-40 or SAE 20W-50.
0
Energy Conserving I1
Oils with these words
on
the
container will help you
save
fuel.
This doughnut-shaped logo (symbol)
is
used
on
most
oil
containers to help
you
select the correct oil.
You should look for this on
the
oil container, and use
only
those oils that display the logo.
GM
Goodwrench@ oil (in Canada,
GM
Engine Oil)
meets all the requirements for your vehicle.
Engine Oil Additives:
Don’t add anything to your oil.
Your Buick dealer is ready
to
advise
if
you
think
something should be added.
When
to
Change Engine
Oil:
See if any one of these
is true for
you:
0
Most trips are less than
4
miles
(6
km).
It’s below freezing outside and most trips are less
The engine is at low speed most of the time (as in
door-to-door delivery, or in stop-and-go traffic).
0
You tow a trailer often.
than
10
miles (16 km).
Most trips are through dusty places.
If any one of these is true for your vehicle, then
you
need to change your oil and filter every 3,000 miles
(5
000
km) or 3 months
--
whichever comes first. (See
“Change Oil Soon” in the Index.)
If
none
of
them is true, change the oil every
7,500
miles
(12
500
km) or 12 months
--
whichever comes first.
Change
the
filter at the first oil change and at every
other oil change after that. (See “Change
Oil
Soon” in
the
Index.)
Engine Block Heater:
An engine block heater can be a
big help
if
you
have
to
park outside in very cold
weather,
-20”
F
(-29
“C) or colder. If your vehicle has
this option, see “Engine Block Heater.”
in
the Index.
What to
Do
with
Used
Oil:
A
CAUTION:
Used engine oil contains things that have cause
skin cancer in laboratory animals. Don't let used
oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your
skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw away
clothing or rags containing used engine
0"
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. Don't
ever dispose of
it
by pouring
it
on
the
ground, into
sewers,
or
into streams or bodies
of
water. Instead,
recycle
it
by taking
it
to a place that collects used oil.
If
you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,
ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
I
Air
Cleaner
The air cleaner is
in
the front right section
of
the engine
compartment. To check or replace the filter, undo the
wing screws and pull the air cleaner open. Replace the
air filter, close the cover and screw
in
the wing screws.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to replace the air filter.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services’’ in the Index.
A
CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner
off
can
cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner
not only cleans the air, it stops flame
if
the
engine backfires.
If
it
isn’t
there, and the engine
backfires, you could be burned. Don’t drive with
it off, and be careful working on the engine with
the air cleaner off.
:
NOTICE:
I
If
the air clean
i
damaging engine fire. And,
dirt
can easily get
into your engine, which will damage
it.
Always
’
have the air cleaner
in
place when you’re driving.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
When
to
Check and Change:
A
good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid
level
is when the engine oil
is
changed. Refer to the
Maintenance Schedule to determine when to change
your fluid. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in
the Index.
How
to
Check:
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at a Buick dealership Service
Department.
If
you
do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or
you
could get a false reading on the
dipstick.
transaxle.
Too
much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts,
starting a fire. Be sure to get an
a
if you check your transaxle fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32 C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic
--
especially in hot weather.
0
While pulling a trailer.
To
get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is
1
80
F
to 200
F
(82OC to 93OC).
Get
the
vehicle warmed up by driving about
15
miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures .are above
50
F
(10OC).
If
it’s colder than
50°F
(lO°C),
you
may have
to drive longer.
To
check the fluid level:
Park your vehicle on a level place.
0
Place the shift lever in
“P’
(Park) with the parking
brake applied.
0
With your foot
on
the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever
in
“P’
(Park).
0
Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these
steps:
1.
Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
2.
Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
3.
Check both sides of the dipstick, and read
the
lower
level. The fluid level must be in the cross-hatched
area.
4.
If the fluid level is where it should be, push the
dipstick back
in
all the way.
How
to
Add
Fluid:
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transaxle fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level
into
the cross-hatched area
on
the
dipstick, It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than a
pint. Don’t overfill. We recommend
you
use only fluid
labeled DEXRONWIE, because
fluids
with that label
are made especially for your automatic transaxle.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRONB-IIE is
not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
0
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back
in
all the way.
Engine
Coolant
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when
it
is low. If you have
a
problem with
engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in the
Index.
The proper coolant for your Buick will:
0
Give freezing protection down to
-34°F
(-37
“C)
.
0
Give boiling protection up to
262
F
(
128
”
C)
.
0
Protect against rust and corrosion.
0
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
0
Let the warning lights work as they should.
What
to
Use:
Use a mixture of one-half clean water (preferably
distilled) and one-half antifreeze that meets “GM
Specification
1825-M,”
which won’t damage aluminum
parts.
You
can also use a recycled coolant conforming to
GM Specification
1825-M
with a complete coolant flush
and refill. Use GM Engine Coolant Supplement (sealer)
with any complete coolant change. If you use these, you
don’t need
to
add anything else.
A
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mix will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning
system
is
set for the proper coolant mix.
With
plain water
or
the wrong mix, your engine could
get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat
warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use
a
50/50
mix of clean
water and a proper antifreeze.
If
you use an improper coolant mix, your engine
:,,I
could overheat and be badly damaged. The’:
.
-
repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
-..
-
’
warranty. Too much water
in
the mix can !ete;::
and crack the engine, radiator, heater
Core
and
other parts.
~. -.- .
~.
..
..._
-
.
.
:-:
-.
~
.
.
~..,
-
Adding
Coolant
6
The coolant recovery tank
IS
located at the
left
of
the
engine compartment.
259
To
Check
Coolant:
When your engine is cold, the
coolant level should be at
“FULL
COLD,”
or a little
higher. When your engine is warm, the level should be
up to
“FULL
HOT,”
or a little higher.
If this light comes
on,
it
means you’re low on engine
coolant.
To
Add
Coolant:
If
you
need more coolant, add
the
proper mix at the coolant recovery .tank.
‘
CAUTION:
T‘urning
the radiator
pressure
cap
when
the
engine
and
radiator are hot
can
allow
steam
and
scalding
liquids
to
blow
out
and
burn
you
badly.
With
the
coolant
recovery
tank,
you
will
almost
never
have
to
add
coolant
at
the
radiator.
Never
turn
the
radiator
pressure
cap
--
even
a
little
-
#hen
the engine and
radiator
are
hot.
I
Add coolant mix at the recovery tank, but be careful not
to spill it.
A
CAUTION:
You can be burned
if
you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn
if
the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
Radiator Pressure Cap
Your radiator pressure cap is
a
15
psi
(105
kPa)
pressure-type cap and must be tightly install
to prevent coolant
loss
and possible engine
damage from overheating. Be sure the arro
the cap line up with the
ov
be on
t
radiator filler neck.
Power Steering Fluid
When you replace your radiator pressure cap, an AC@
cap
is
recommended.
Thermostat
Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat
in the engine coolant system. The thermostat stops the
flow
of
coolant through the radiator until the coolant
reaches a preset temperature.
When
you
replace your thermostat, an AC@ thermostat
is
recommended.
How
To
Check Power Steering Fluid:
Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace
the
cap and completely tighten it. Then remove
the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
When the engine compartment is
hot,
the level
should be at the
“HOT”
mark.
0
When the engine compartment is cool, the level
should be at the “FULL COLD” mark.
What
to
Add:
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
to
determine what
kind
of
fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants”
in
the Index.
NOTICE:
When adding power steering fluid or making a
complete fluid change, always use the proper
fluid. Failure to use the proper flui
leaks and damage hoses and seals
Windshield Washer Fluid
To
Add:
t
_.
.
.
.a
_.
-
i
Open the cap labeled
“WASHER
FLUID
ONLY.”
Add washer fluid until the
bottle
is
full.
0
0
0
0
Brake Master Cylinder
Your brake master cylinder is here. It is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
your master cylinder might
go
down. The first
is
that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back
up.
The other reason
is
that
fluid
is
leaking out of the brake system.
If
it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak means
balance between your front and rear brakes can change,
for the worse. The braking performance you’ve come to
expect can change
in
many other ways
if
someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Every new Buick has a Delco Freedom@ battery. You
never have to add water to one of these. When it’s time
for a new battery, we recommend a Delco Freedoms
battery. Get one that has the catalog number shown on
the original battery’s label.
Vehicle
Storage
If
you’re not going to drive your vehicle for
25
days or
more, take
off
the black, negative
(-)
cable from the
battery. This will help keep your battery from running
down.
I
A
CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting’’ in the Index
for tips on working around
a
battery without
getting hurt.
I
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Halogen Bulbs
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst
if
you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Take special care when
handling and disposing of halogen bulbs.
Headlamp Bulb Replacement
Remove the retainers
by
turning in a counter-clockwise
direction.
-.
Each headlamp
is
attached by retainers with round
plastic knobs.
I
Lift
the headlamp away from the car.
Turn the bulb socket 1/4
turn counter-clockwise,
while pressing it firmly.
Remove wire connector
from the bulb by lifting
the lock tab and pulling it
away from the plastic
base.
Taillamp Bulb Replacement
To
reassemble, attach the wire connector
(A)
to the
plastic base making sure the lock tab
(B)
is over the lock
(C).
Install the bulb by putting the small tab
(D)
into the
small notch in the lamp
(E).
Turn
the
bulb socket 1/4
turn clockwise to lock into place.
Open the trunk. On either side
of
the rear
of
the trunk
are two plastic nuts. Remove only the side that you need
to
access. Pull the carpet back away from the rear area.
1
Loading
Your
Vehicle
The taillamp, sidemarker and back-up lights can now be
accessed. Two of the taillamp bulbs are on a tabbed
assembly. Squeeze the release in and pull the assembly
out. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket. To
replace the assembly, the tabs must be inserted into the
slots. Push the other end in until it locks into place.
To
replace the third taillamp bulb and sidemarker bulb,
turn the socket
1/4
turn and pull it out. Pull the bulb
straight out from the socket.
The backup bulb can be replaced by squeezing the lock
on the socket, turning it
l/4
turn and pulling it out. Pull
the bulb straight out. Reverse the above steps
to
reassemble the light and the trunk trim.
Tm
OCCUPANTS VEHICLE
CAP.
WT.
TIRE-LOADING INFORMATION
FRT. CTR.
RR.
TOTAL LBS.
.~
~~
.
.
~
KG-
MAX. LOADING
&
GVWR SAME AS VEHICLE
CAPACITY WEIGHT XXX COLD TIRE
TIRE SIZE SPEED PRESSURE RTG PSVKPa
FRT.
RR.
SPA.
IF
TIRES ARE HOT, ADD 4PSV28KPa
SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
ll]m\:l
.$$;;r#,
:
\
M
Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it
may properly carry. The Tire Loading Information Label
found on the rear edge of the driver's door tells you the
proper size, speed rating and recommended inflation
pressures for the tires
on
your vehicle. It also gives you
important information about the number
of
people that
can be in your vehicle and the total weight that you can
carry. This weight
is
called the Vehicle Capacity Weight
and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all
nonfactory-installed options.
268
MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP
DATE GVWR GAWR FRT GAWR
RR
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLI-
CABLE
US.
FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE
SAFETY, BUMPER, AND THEFT PREVENTION
STANDARDS IN EFFECT
ON
THE DATE OF
MANUFACTURE.SHOWN ABOVE.
The other label
is
the Certification label, found
on
the
rear edge of the driver’s door.
It
tells you the gross
weight capacity
of
your vehicle, called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes
the
weight
of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
Never exceed
the
GVWR for
your
vehicle, or
the
Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front
or
rear
axle.
And,
if
you do have
a
heavy load,
you
should spread it
out. Don’t carry more than
176
pounds
(80
kilograms)
in your trunk.
.A
CAUTION:
I
Do
not
load
your
vehicle
any
heavier than
the
GVWR
or
the
maximum
front
and
rear
GAWRs.
If
you
do,
parts
on
your
vehicle
can
break,
or
it
can
change the
way
your
vehicle handles.
These
could
cause
you
to
lose
control.
Also,
overloading
can
shorten the
life
of
your
vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle
--
like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else
--
they
will go as fast
as the vehicle goes.
If
you have to stop or
turn
quickly,
or if there
is
a
crash, they'll keep going.
k!,
CAUTION':
Things
you
put inside your vehicle can strike and
injure people
in
a
sudden stop
or
turn,
or
in
a
crash.
Put things
in
the trun'k of
your
vehicle.
Put
them as far forward
as
you can.
Try
to spread the weight evenly.
0
Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle
so
that
some
of
them are
above
the
tops
of
the seats.
When
you
carry something inside the
vehicle, secure
it
whenever
you
can.
need to.
0
Don't leave
a
seat folded down unless
you
Tires
We don't make tires. Your new vehicle comes with high
quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. These
tires are warranted by the tire manufacturers and their
warranties are delivered with every new Buick. If your
spare tire is a different brand than your road tires, you
will have a tire warranty folder from each of these
manufacturers.
1
/rl
CAUTION:
I
I
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are
I
dangerous.
0
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as
a
result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle”
in
the Index.
Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should checked
when your tires are cold.
0
Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,
punctured, or broken by
a
sudden impact,
such
as
when you
hit
a
pothole. Keep tires
at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If
your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
I-
-
Inflation
-
Tire Pressure
The Tire-Loading Information label which is located
on
the rear edge
of
the driver’s door shows the correct
inflation pressures
for
your tires, when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least.
three hours or driven
--
3
more than a mile.
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
,overinflation
is
When
to
Check:
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at
60
psi
(420
Ha).
How
to
Check:
Use
a good quality pocket-type gage to
check tire pressure. Simply looking
at
the tires will not
tell you the pressure, especially
if
you have radial tires
--
which may look properly inflated even if they’re
underinflated.
i
If
your tires have valve caps, be sure to
put
them back
on. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
Tire Inspection
and
Rotation
To make your tires last longer, have them inspected and
rotated at the mileages recommended
in
the
Maintenance Schedule. See “Scheduled Maintenance
Services” in the Index.
Use
this
rotation pattern.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire-Loading
Information label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are
properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque”
in
the
Index.
CAUTION:
Rust
or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts
to
which
it
is
fastened, can make wheel nuts become
loose after a time. The wheel could come
off
and
cause an accident. When you change a wheel,
remove any
rust
or
dirt
from places where the
wheel attaches
to
the vehicle.
In
an emergency,
you can use a cloth or a paper towel to
do
this;
but
be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if
you need
to,
to get
all
the rust or
dirt
off.
(See
“Changing a Flat Tire”
in
the Index.)
When
It’s
Time for
New
Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear.
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only
2/32
inch
(1.6
mm) or less
of
tread
remaining.
You need a new tire if:
YOU
can see the indicators at three places around the
tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s
rubber.
0
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep
enough to show cord or fabric.
0
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
273
The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because
of
the size or location
of the damage.
Buying
New
Tires
To find out what kind and size
of
tires you need, look at
the Tire-Loading Information label.
The tires installed
on
your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get
new
tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way,
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle.
If
your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by a
“MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure
they
are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
.\
CAUTION:
Xing tires could cause
you
to
lose
control
hile
driving.
If
you mix tires
ob
different sizes or
types (radial and bias-betted tires;), the vehicle
may
not handle
properly,
and you
coutd
have a
crash.
Be
sure to use the same
size
and
type
tires
on
all
wheels.
It’s all right to drive
with
your
compact
spare,
bbugh.
It
was developed
for
limited
use
on
your
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold
in
the United States.)
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded
150
would wear one and a half
(1
1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire
graded
100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions
of
their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction
-
A,
B,
C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are: A,
B,
and
C.
They represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled conditions
on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete.
A
tire marked
C
may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on
braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and does not
include cornering (turning) traction.
Temperature
-
A,
B,
C
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B,
and
C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability
to
dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions
on
a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life,
and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade
C
corresponds
to
a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No.
109.
Grades
B
and
A
represent higher levels
of
performance
on
the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Those grades are molded on the sidewalls
of
passenger
car tires.
While the tires available as standard or optional
equipment on General Motors vehicles may vary with
respect to these grades, all such tires meet General
Motors performance standards and have been approved
for use on General Motors vehicles. All passenger type
(P
Metric) tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements
in
addition to these grades.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
275
In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels
aligned again. However, if
you
notice unusual tire wear
or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the
alignment may need to be reset.
If
you
notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted.
If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts,
and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If
the wheel leaks air
out,
replace it (except some aluminum wheels, which
can sometimes be repaired). See your Buick dealer if
any
of
these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind
of
wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the
same way
as
the one it replaces.
If
you
need
to
replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts, replace them
only
with new
GM
original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure
to
have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for your Buick
model.
A
CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
rngerous. It could affect the braking and
..
~ndling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air
and make you lose control. You could have a
collision
in
which you or others could be injured.
-
..ways use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,
~
d
I
wheel
nuts
for replacement.
I
1:
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can
atso
cause Droblems with
bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer/odometer calibration, headllgb,,
aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance
and tire or tire chain clearance to the body an(
chassis.
i
teplacement
WFpels
Tire
Chains
I
/11
CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been use#-. Jr
how many miles it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause an accident.
If
you
t---
re to
replace a wheel use anew
GM
original
equipment wheel.
I
277
Appearance
Care
I
A
CAUTION:
Cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are
I
I
toxic. Others can burst into flame
if
you strike a
match or get them on a hot part
of
the vehicle.
Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes
in
a closed space. When you use anything in a
container to clean your Buick, be sure to follow
the instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
Gasoline
0
Benzene
Naphtha
0
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
0
Paint Thinner
0
Turpentine
0
Lacquer Thinner
I
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous
--
some more than
others
--
and they can all damage your vehicle,
-
278
Cleaning the Inside
of
Your
Buick
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl with
a
clean, damp cloth.
Your Buick dealer has two
GM
cleaners
--
a
solvent-type spot lifter and a foam-type powdered
cleaner. They will clean normal spots and stains very
well.
Here are some cleaning tips:
0
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
0
Clean up stains as soon as you can ore they set.
0
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used
if
stains are
stubborn.
Use solvent-type cleaners
in
a well-ventilated area
If
a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire
only. If you use them, don’t saturate the stained area.
area immediately or
it
will set.
Using Foam-Type Cleaner on Fabric
Vacuum and brush
the
area to remove any loose dirt.
0
Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner following the
Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge.
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
directions on the container label.
0
Don’t saturate the material.
0
Don’t rub
it
roughly.
0
As
soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove
the
suds.
Rinse the section with a clean, wet sponge.
Wipe off what’s left with a slightly damp paper towel
or cloth.
Then dry
it
immediately with an air hose, a hair
dryer or a heat lamp.
e
careful with
a
hair dry
Wipe with a clean cloth.
Using Solvent-Type Cleaner on
Fabric
First, see
if
you have
to
use solvent-type cleaner at all.
Some spots and stains will clean
off
better with just
water and mild soap.
If you need to use it, then:
Gently scrape excess soil from the trim material with
a clean, dull knife or scraper. Use very little cleaner,
light pressure and clean cloths (preferably
cheesecloth). Cleaning should start at
the
outside of
the
stain, “feathering” toward the center. Keep
changing
to
a clean section of the cloth,
the area with an air hose, hair dryer, or heat lamp to
help prevent a cleaning ring. (See the previous
NOTICE.)
When you clean a stain from fabric, immediately dry
Special Cleaning Problems
Greasy
or
Oily Stains:
Like grease, oil, butter,
margarine, shoe polish, coffee with cream, chewing
gum, cosmetic creams, vegetable oils, wax crayon, tar
and asphalt.
Carefully scrape off excess stain.
0
Then follow the solvent-type instructions above.
0
Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and asphalt will stain if
left on a vehicle seat fabric. They should be removed
as soon as possible. Be careful, because the cleaner
will dissolve them and may cause them
to
bleed.
Non-Greasy Stains:
Like catsup, coffee (black), egg,
fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, wine, vomit, urine and
blood.
0
0
0
Carefully scrape
off
excess
stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions
above.
If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat
the
area with a waterbaking soda solution:
1
teaspoon
(5
ml) of baking soda
to
1
cup
(250
ml) of
lukewarm water.
Finally,
if
needed, clean lightly with solvent-type
Combination Stains:
Like candy, ice cream,
mayonnaise, chili sauce and unknown stains.
Carefully scrape
off
excess stain, then clean with
If a stain remains, clean it with solvent-type cleaner.
cleaner.
cool
water and allow to dry.
Cleaning Vinyl or Leather
Just
use
warm water and a clean cloth.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth
to
remove dirt.
You
0
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain
if
may have to do it more than once.
you
don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth and
solvent-type vinyl/leather cleaner.
Cleaning the
Top
of
the Instrument
Panel
Use
only
mild soap and water
to
clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Cleaning Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a Delco-Bose speaker cover gently,
so
that the speaker won’t be damaged. If something gets on
one
of
them, follow the steps earlier under “Using
Solvent-Type Cleaner on Fabric.” Use as little solvent as
you
can.
Care
of
Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
caus.e scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
window, since they may have to be scraped
off
later.
If
abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.
Cleaning .the Outside of the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
A
CAUTION:
Do
not bleach
or
dye safety belts.
If
you
do,
it
may severely weaken them. In a crash they might
not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean
safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm
I
I
Glass
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass ueaner (GM
Part
No.
1050427)
or a liquid household glass cleaner
will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films.
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax
or other material may be
on
the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM
Windshield Cleaner, Bon-Ami Powders (GM Part
No.
105001
1).
The windshield is clean
if
beads do not form
when you rinse it with water.
Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth
soaked in
full
strength windshield washer solvent. Then
rinse the blade with water.
Wiper blades should be checked on
a
regular basis and
replaced when worn.
Cleaning the Outside
of
Your
Buick
The paint finisll on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing
Your
Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold
Water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use
liquid hand, dish or car washing (non-detergent) soaps.
Don’t use cleaning agents that contain acid or abrasives.
All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not
allowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry
the finish with a soft, clean chamois or a
100%
cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your
vehicle.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your Buick may
be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish.
You
can get
GM
approved cleaning products from your
dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the
Index
.)
Your Buick has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat.
282
Aluminum Wheels
(If
So
Equipped)
Your aluminum wheels have a protective coating similar
to the painted surface
of
your car. Don’t use strong
soaps, chemicals, chrome polish, or other abrasive
cleaners on them because
you
could damage this
coating. After rinsing thoroughly, a wax may be applied.
I
NOTICE:
If
you
have aluminum wheels, don’t use an
automatic vehicle wash that has hard silicon
carbide cleaning brushes. These brushes can
take
off
the protective coating.
White Sidewall Tires
Your Buick dealer has a GM White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner. You can use a stiff brush with
it.
Weatherstrips
These are places where glass or metal meets rubber.
Silicone grease there will make them last longer, seal
better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease
with a clean cloth at least every six months.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle
is
damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Foreign Material
Calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents,
road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, and other foreign matter can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces.
Use
cleaners that are marked safe for painted
surfaces for these stains.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in
the
finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on
the
underbody.
If
these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or
an
underbody vehicle washing system
can do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etchgd into
the paint surface.
Although no defect
in
the paint job causes this, Buick
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20
000
km)
of
purchase,
whichever comes first.
Appearance Care and Maintenance Materials
You
can
get these
from
your Buick dealer.
*
Not recommended for pigskin suede leather.
See Your General Motors Dealers for These Products.
See Your Maintenance Schedule for Other Products.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
II
ID
BllHlll1111111
IIIIIM
1111
1111
111
llllllll1111111111111111
I=
m,
SAMPLE4UXPM072675
ENGINE
A93
\
ASSEMBLY
CODE MODEL YEAR PLANT
This is the legal identifier for your Buick. It appears
on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side. You can see it
if
you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates
of
title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in your VIN is the engine code for
your
GM
engine. This code will help you identify
your
engine, specifications, and replacement parts
in
this
section.
Service
Parts
Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the spare tire cover. It’s very
helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:
0
Your VIN.
0
Its model designation.
0
Paint information.
0
A
list of all production options and special
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
equipment.
Add-on Electrical Equipment
I
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your Buick
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
~
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
~
warranty. Some of it can just keep other things
~
from working as they should.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your car are protected from short
circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit breakers.
This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by
electrical problems.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a
spare fuse, you can “borrow” one of the correct value.
Just pick some feature
of
your car that you can get along
without
--
like the radio or cigarette lighter
--
and use its
fuse,
if
it
is of the value you need. Replace
it
as soon as
you can.
tl
R
towards you. It will come down
so
the
fuses can be
accessed.
Remove the cover to access the fuses.
To
put
the
cover
on, insert the tabs into the lower part of the fuse panel
and snap
it
in
place. Squeeze the tabs together and then
push the fuse panel back up into the instrument panel
until
it locks
in
place.
The fuse panel
is
located under the instrument panel,
next to the parking brake.
To
release and lower the fuse
panel, squeeze
the
two tabs together. Then pull
it
287
FUSE
USAGE
Amp
Description
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
10
20
30
30
15
10
20
10
15
15
20
20
15
15
10
25
10
10
10
20
25
10
25
Crank Signal
-
Sir
Trunk Release/Fuel.Dr Rel/Back-up Lamps
Breaker Pwr Wdo/Sun Roof
Brkr-Pwr Acsry
Not Used
Ign/Ret Acsry ContDnst Cstr
Supplemental Inflatable Rst
Corn Lps/Turn Sig
Spare
Spare
Bat/Radio/IP/Oil Life Oil Level/Frt Lighter
Electronic Level Control
Brake
&
Hazard Lamps
Park Lamps
Courtesy Lps/Pwr Mirrors
Cooling Fan/Transmission
Air Cond
Not
Used
Antilock Brakes
Low Cool/Lp Mon/Oil Lvl-life
IP Lighting
Spare
Spare
IgnitionBadio
Wiperwasher
The fuse chart, below, shows how
to
tell
a
blown fuse
from a
good
fuse.
GOOD
FUSE
1
BLOWN
.r,
'
\'
gJ
'TI
r
FUSE
GM PART
NO.
'
RATING
'
COLOF
12004003
....................
3 AMP VIOLET
12004005
...................
5
AMP TAN
12004006
...................
7.5 AMP BROWN
12004007
...................
10
AMP RED
12004008
...................
15 AMP LIGHT BLUE
12004009
...................
20
AMP YELLOW
12004010
...................
25 AMP WHITE
1200401
1
...................
30 AMP LIGHT GREEN
There are additional fuses located behind
the
right sound
insulator panel on the passenger side. If these require
service, see your Buick dealer.
Maxifuse/Relay Center
To
check the fuses
in
this underhood fuse center, turn
the two knobs
1/4
turn
counterclockwise and remove the
cover. The inside of
the
cover has a chart that explains
the features and controls governed by each fuse and
relay.
The PASS-Key 'I1
TM
fuse is located in the right side relay
center.
Headlights
The headlight wiring is protected by a circuit breaker
in
the underhood fuse center.
An
electrical overload will
cause
the
lights to go on and
off,
or in some cases to
remain
off.
If
this happens, have your headlight wiring
checked right away.
*
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If
the overload is caused by some electrical problem and
not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers
in
the fuse panel protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When
the
current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes
away.
Park Avenue Dimensions
Inches Unless Otherwise Noted
Overall:
Length
..........................
205.3
Width
...........................
74.9
Height
...........................
55.1
Wheel Base
......................
110.8
Front Tread
.......................
60.5
Rear Tread
........................
60.2
Interior Front:
Leg Room
........................
42.0
Head Room
.......................
38.8
Shoulder Room
....................
59.1
Hip
Room
........................
55.1
Interior Rear:
Leg
Room
........................
41.6
Head Room
.......................
38.8
Shoulder Room
....................
59.1
Hip
Room
........................
55.1
Trunk Capacity
.
Cu
.
Ft
..............
20.3
Passengers:
Front
...............................
3
Rear
................................
3
Base Curb Weight
.
Lbs
...............
3580
(ULTRA)
...........................
3673
Replaceable
Light
Bulbs
Application Number
Exterior
Headlight
High Beam
.........................
9005
Low Beam
.........................
9006
Park/Turn
........................
2057NA
Park
..............................
194NA
Side Marker
........................
194NA
Backup
.............................
3156
Cornering
...........................
1156
High Level Stop
......................
1156
License
..............................
194
Side Marker
............................
24
Tail
.................................
194
Tail/Stop/Turn
........................
3057
Application Number
Interior Illumination
Ashtray
..............................
194
Dome/Reading. Front
...................
562
Reading. Rear
.........................
564
Door Courtesy
......................
PC 168
Door Warning
......................
PC 168
Engine Compartment
...................
561
Footwell Courtesy
......................
168
GloveBox
............................
194
Luggage Compartment
...............
EP6-93
Vanity Mirror. Front and Rear
.............
564
Capacities
and
Specifications
Engine Code
L1
(L27)2
3.8L
V-6
SF1
Engine Code
l1
(L67)2
3.8L
V-6
SF1
Belt Tensions
-
Automatically controlled by a Self-Tension idler
pulley. Tension adjustment should never be
necessary.
Cooling System Capacity
-
With air conditioning: 13 quarts/l2.5 liters
Crankcase Capacity
-
4 quarts/3.8 liters
Air Conditioning Capacity4
-
2.87 lbs. (1.09 kilograms)
Fuel Tank Capacity
-
18.0 gallons/68 liters
Transaxle
-
Drain
&
Refill
-
6 quarts/5.6 liters
Maintenance Item Part
Numbers3
-
Air
Filter
-
A1096C
Fuel Filter
-
GF580
Oil Filter
-
PF47
PCV Valve
-
CV892C
Radiator Cap
-
RC27
Spark Plug
-
41-600, GAP 0.060”
~~~~ ~~~
-.
____
____
~~
-.
~~ ~ ~~ ~ ~
1
8th Character
of
the Vehicle Identification Number.
2
Made in a
GM
plant in
the
United States,
3
Part numbers are AC type.
4
Air
Conditioning Refrigerant: Not all air-conditioning refrigerants are the same.
If
the air conditioning system in your
vehicle needs refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used.
If
you’re not sure ask your Buick dealer.
292
Part
7
Maintenance Schedule
I
This part covers the maintenance required for your Buick
.
Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety.
dependability and emission control performance
.
Part
7
includes:
Introduction
......................................................................
294
A Word About Maintenance
.....................................................
294
Your Vehicle and the Environment
................................................
295
How
This Part is Organized
.....................................................
295
Section
A:
Scheduled Maintenance Services
..............................................
296
Using Your Maintenance Schedules
...............................................
296
SelectingtheRightSchedule
....................................................
297
Schedule1
...................................................................
298
Schedule11
..................................................................
300
Explanation of Scheduled .Maintenance Services
.....................................
302
Section
B:
Owner Checks
and
Services
.................................................
304
AtEachFuelFill
..............................................................
304
AtLeastOnceaMonth
.........................................................
305
AtLeastOnceaYear
..........................................................
305
Section C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
............................................
308
Section
D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
.........................................
309
Section
E:
Maintenance Record
.......................................................
311
293
.
..
......
....
..-..-
...........
-
___
~~
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps
to
keep your
vehicle
in
good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance or
the
removal of important components can significantly
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or even the wrong tire inflation can increase
the
level of emissions from your vehicle.
To
help protect
our environment, and to help keep your vehicle
in
good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
How
This Part is Organized
The remainder
of
this part is divided into five sections:
“Section A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex,
so
unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let
your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service center do these jobs.
A
CAUTION:
“-rforming
maintenance work on a vehicle
can
De
dangerous.
In
trying
to
do some
jobs,
you can
be seriously injured.
Do
your
own maintenance
work
only
if
you have the required know-how and
the
proper
tools
and equipment
for
the
job.
If
you
’~
ue any doubt, have
a
qualified
technician
do
If you are skilled enough to do some work on your
vehicle, you will probably want to get the service
information GM publishes. You will find a list
of
publications and how to get them in’this manual. See
“Service Publications”
in
the
Index.
“Section
B:
Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked whenever you stop for fuel. It also
explains what you can easily do to help keep your
vehicle
in
good condition.
“Section
C:
Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your Buick dealer’s service
department or another qualified service center should
perform.
“Section
D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some products GM recommends to help keep your
vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their
equivalents, should be used whether you do the work
yourself or have
it
done.
“Section
E:
Maintenance Record” provides a place for
you to record the maintenance performed on your
vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be
sure to write it down in this section. This will
help
you
determine
when
your
next
maintenance should be done.
In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance
receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
Section
A:
Scheduled Maintenance
Services
Using
Your
Maintenance
Schedules
This section tells you the maintenance services you
should have done and when you should schedule them.
Your Buick dealer knows your vehicle best and wants
you to be happy
with
it.
If you go to your dealer for your
service needs, you’ll know
that
GM-trained and
supported service people will perform the work using
genuine GM parts.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
carry passengers and cargo
within
recommended
limits. You
will
find these limits on your vehicle’s
Tire-Loading Information label. See “Loading Your
Vehicle”
in
the Index.
are driven
on
reasonable road surfaces within legal
0
use
the recommended unleaded fuel. See “Fuel” in
driving limits.
the Index.
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is
right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which
schedule to follow:
Schedule
I
Is
any one of these true for your vehicle?
Most trips are less than
4
miles
(6
km).
Most trips are less than
10
miles
(16
km)
when
outside temperatures are below freezing.
The engine is at low speed most of the time (as
in
door-to-door delivery, or
in
stop-and-go traffic).
You operate your vehicle in dusty areas.
You tow a trailer.
If
any one (or more)
of
these
is
true for your driving,
follow Schedule
I.
Schedule
I1
Follow Schedule
I1
only
if
none of the above conditions
is true.
Scheduled Maintenance Services Schedule
I
Follow Schedule
I
if your car
is
MAINLY
driven under one or more of the following conditions:
0
When most trips are less than
4
miles
(6
kilometers).
0
When most trips are less than
10
miles
(16
kilometers) and outside temperatures remain below freezing.
0
When most trips include extended idling and/or frequent low-speed operation as
in
stop-and-go traffic.
0
Towing a trailer."?
0
When operating in dusty areas.
Schedule
I
should
also
be followed if the car is used for delivery service, police, taxi or other commercial applications.
TO
BE
SERVICED
(See Explanation
of
Scheduled Maintenance
Services Following
-
Schedules
I
and
11)
Item
No.
1.
Engine Oil
&
Oil Filter
Change*
2.
Chassis Lubrication
3.
Throttle Body Mounting
Bolt Torque*
4.
Tire
&
Wheel Inspection
&
Rotation
5.
Engine Accessory Drive
Belt(s) Inspection*
TO
BE SERVICED
(See Explanation
of
Scheduled Maintenance
Services Following
Schedules I and
11)
WHEN
TO
PERFORM
Miles (kilometers) or
Months, Whichever
Occurs First
Ztem
No.
Every
30
000
mi.
6'
'''ling
System
Service*
(50
000
km) or 24 months.
I
7.
Transaxle Service See Explanation
of
Scheduled
Maintenance Service
Following Schedules
I
and
I1
I
8*
Spark
Replacement*
9.
Spark Plug
I
Wire Inspection*?
Replacement"?
1
1.
Fuel Tank, Cap
&
Lines Inspection
Every
30
000
mi
(50
000
km)
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
a
a
a
a
a
a
The services shown
in
this schedule up to
48
000
miles
(80
000
km) should be performed after
48
000
miles at the same
intervals.
*
An Emission Control Service.
f
The
U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the
completion
of
Record".
vehicle useful life. General Motors, however, urges that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded in "Section E:Maintenance
12.
Supercharger Oil Check Every
30
000
mi
(3.8L
Code
1
engine only)
(50
000
km) or
36
months
MILES
(000)
..
6
9
12
15
18
KILOMETERS
(000)
5
Scheduled Maintenance Services Schedule
I1
~~
-11
ONLY
if none of the driving conditions specified in Schedule
I
apply.
TO
BE SERVICED
(See Explanation of
Scheduled Maintenance
Services Following
Schedules
I
and
11)
Item
No.
1.
Engine Oil Change*
Oil Filter Change*
2.
Chassis Lubrication
3.
Throttle Body Mounting Bolt Torque*
4.
Tire
&
Wheel Inspection
&
Rotation
5.
Engine Accessory Drive Belt(s) Inspection*
6.
Cooling System Service*
7.
Transaxle Service
WHEN
TO
PERFORM
Miles (kilometers) or
Months, Whichever
Occurs First
Every
7
500
mi.
(12
500
km)
or 12 mos.
At first and then every other oil change
Every
7
500
mi.
(
12
500
km) or 12 mos.
At
7
500
mi. (12
500
km) only
At
7
500
mi. (12
500
km) and then every
15
000
mi.
(25
000
km) or as necessary
Every
30
000
mi.
(50
000
km) or
24
mos.
See Explanation
of
Scheduled Maintenance
Services Following Schedules
I
and
I1
MILES
(000)
KILOMETERS
(000)
25
.I.
I
62.5
75
0
0
0
0
0
0
TO
BE
SERVICED
(See Explanation
of
Scheduled Maintenance
Services Following
Schedules
I
and
11)
Item
No.
8.
Spark Plug Replacement*
9.
Spark Plug Wire Inspection”?
10.
Air Cleaner Filter Replacement*
1 1.
Fuel Tank, Cap
&
Lines Inspection*?
12. Supercharger Oil Check
I
(3.8L
Code
1
engine only)
WHEN TO PERFORM
Miles (kilometers) or
Months, Whichever
Occurs First
Every
30
000
mi.
(50
000
km)
I
MILES
(000)
The services shown in this schedule up
to
45
000
miles
(75
000
km) should be performed after
45
000
miles at the
Same
intervals.
I
Explanation
of
Scheduled Maintenance
Services
Below are explanations of
the
services listed in Schedule
I and Schedule
11.
The proper fluids and lubricants to
use
are listed in
Section
D.
Make sure whoever services your vehicle
uses these. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives
the vehicle.
NOTE: To determine your engine’s displacement and
code, see “Engine Identification” in the Index.
1.
Engine Oil and Filter Change*
--
Always use
SG
Energy Conserving I1 oils of proper viscosity. The
“SG” designation may be shown alone or in
combination with others, such as “SG/CC”,
“SG/CD” or
“SF,
SG, CC,” etc. To determine the
preferred viscosity for your vehicle’s engine (e.g.,
SAE
5W-30
or SAE
10W-30),
see “Engine Oil” in
the Index. If your vehicle has an Engine
Oil
Life
Monitor,
the
monitor will show
you
when
to
change
the oil. See “Engine Oil Life Monitor” in the Index.
*
An Emission Control Service.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Chassis Lubrication
--
Lubricate the transaxle shift
linkage, parking brake cable guides, underbody
contact points and linkage. If your vehicle is
equipped with grease fittings, lubricate the
suspension and steering linkage.
Throttle Body Mounting Bolt Torque”
--
Check
the torque
of
the mounting bolts and/or nuts.
Tire and Wheel Rotation and Inspection
--
For
proper wear and maximum tire life, rotate your tires
following the instructions in this manual. See “Tires,
Inspection
&
Rotation” in the Index. Check the tires
for uneven wear or damage. If you see irregular or
premature wear, check the wheel alignment. Check
for damaged wheels also.
Engine Accessory Drive Belt(s) Inspection
--
Inspect
the
belt(s) for cracks, fraying, wear and
proper tension. Replace as needed.
Cooling System Service*
--
Drain, flush and refill
the system with new or approved recycled coolant
conforming to GM Specification
1825M.
Keep
coolant at the proper mixture
as
specified. See
“Coolant” in the Index. This provides.proper freeze
protection, corrosion inhibitor level and engine
operating temperature.
The
U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty
or
limit recall liability prior
to
the completion
of
vehicle
useful life. General Motors, however, urges that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be
recorded
in
“Section E:Maintenance Record”.
302
Inspect hoses and replace if they are cracked,
swollen or deteriorated. Tighten screw-type hose
clamps. Clean the outside of the radiator and air
conditioning condenser. Wash the pressure cap and
neck.
To
help ensure proper operation, we recommend a
pressure test of both the cooling system and the
pressure cap.
7.
Transaxle Service
--
Change both the fluid and
filter every 15,000 miles (25
000
km) if the vehicle
is mainly driven under
one
or more of these
conditions:
In
heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches
90
OF
(32 “C) or
higher.
In
hilly or mountainous terrain.
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, police car or delivery
If you do
not
use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change both the fluid and filter every
100,000 miles
(
160
000
km).
service.
8.
Spark Plug Replacement*
--
Replace spark plugs
with the proper type. See “Specifications Chart” in
the Index.
9.
Spark Plug Wire Inspection*?
--
Inspect for
burns, cracks or other damage. Check the boot fit at
the distributor and at the spark plugs. Replace wires
as needed.
10.
Air Cleaner Filter Replacement*
--
Replace every
30,000
miles (50
000
km) or more often under dusty
conditions. Ask your dealer for the proper
replacement intervals for your driving conditions.
11.
Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection*?
--
Inspect
fuel tank, cap and lines (including
fuel
rails and
injection assembly) for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel
cap gasket for an even filler neck imprint or any
damage. Replace parts as needed. Periodic
replacement of the fuel filter
is
not required.
12.
Supercharger Oil Check
--
Check oil every
30,000
miles
(50
000
km) or
36
months. Add the proper
synthetic
oil.
S.ee “Recommended Fluid and
Lubricants’’ in the Index.
*
An Emission Control Service.
?
The
U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency has determined that the failure
to
perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty
or
limit recall liability prior to the completion of vehicle
useful life. General Motors, however, urges that all recommended maintenance services
be
performed at
the
indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded
in
‘‘Section E:Maintenance Record’‘.
303
Section
B:
Owner Checks
and
Services
Listed below are owner checks and services which
should be performed
at
the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
.
performance of your vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in
Section
D.
At
Each Fuel
Fill
(It is important for
you
or a service station attendant
to perform these underhood checks at each fuel
fill.
CHECK
OR
SERVICE
Engine Oil
Level
Engine Coolant
Level
Windshield
Washer Fluid
Level
WHAT
TO
DO
Check
the
engine oil level and add
the
proper oil if necessary. See
“Engine Oil”
in
the Index for further
details.
Check the engine coolant level
in
the
coolant recovery tank and add the
proper coolant mix
if
necessary. See
“Coolant” in the Index
for
further
details.
Check the windshield washer fluid
level in the windshield washer tank
and add the proper fluid
if
necessary.
See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in
the
Index for further details.
304
At Least Once
A
Month
WHAT TO
DO
Tire Inflation Check tire inflation. Make sure they
are inflated to
the
pressures specified
on the Tire-Loading Information
label located
on
the rear edge of
the
driver’s door. See “Tires”
in
the
Index for further details.
At Least Once
A
Year
CHECK OR
SERVICE
I
WHAT TO DO
Key Lock Lubricate the key lock cylinders
with
Cylinders the lubricant specified
in
Section
D.
Body Lubricate all body door hinges. Also
Lubrication lubricate all hinges and latches,
including those’ for the hood, glove
box door and console door. Section
D
tells you what to use.
CHECK
OR
SERVICE
I
WHAT TO
DO
Starter Switch
I
1.
Before you start, be sure you have
enough room around the vehicle.
2.
Firmly apply both the parking brake
(see “Parking Brake”
in
the
Index if
necessary) and the regular brake.
NOTE:
Do
not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn
off
the
engine immediately
if
it
starts.
3.
Try to start the engine
in
each gear.
The starter should work only
in
“P”
(Park) or “N” (Neutral). If the starter
works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
CHECK OR
SERVICE
Brake-Transaxle
Shift Interlock
(Automatic
Transaxle)
--
BTSI
WHAT TO
DO
I‘
injured.
Follow the steps
below.
1.
Before you start, be sure you have
enough room around the vehicle. It
should be parked on
a
level surface.
2.
Firmly apply the parking brake (see
“Parking Brake”
in
the Index
if
necessary).
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately
if
the vehicle
begins to move.
3.
With the engine off, turn the key to
the
“RUN”
position, but don’t start
the engine. Without applying the
regular brake,
try
to move the shift
lever out of
“P’
(Park)
with
normal
effort. If the shift lever moves out
of
“P”
(Park), your vehicle’s BTSI
needs service.
CHECK
OR
SERVICE
Steering
Column Lock
WHAT
TO
DO
~ ~~
While parked, and with the parking
brake set, try to
turn
the key to
“LOCK”
in
each shift lever position.
The key should turn to “LOCK”
only when the shift lever
is
in
“P”
(Park).
0
The key should come out only in
“LOCK.”
CHECK OR
SERVICE
Parking Brake
and Automatic
Transaxle
“P”
(Park)
Mechanism
Check
WHAT TO
DO
CAUTION:
When you are doing
this check, your vehicle could
begin to mowe. You or others
could be injured and property
could
be
damaged.
Make
sure
there is room
in
front
of
your
vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the
vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
your foot on
the
regular brake, set the
parking brake.
0
To
check the parking brake: With
the
engine running and transaxle
in“N” (Neutral), slowly remove
foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal.
Do
this
until
the
vehicle is held by the parking brake
only.
To
check the “P” (Park)
mechanism’s holding ability: Shift
to “P” (Park). Then release all
brakes.
CHECK OR
SERVICE
I
WHAT TO
DO
Underbody At least every spring, use plain water
Flushing to flush any corrosive materials from
the underbody. Take care to clean
thoroughly any areas where mud and
other debris can collect.
Section
C:
Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed below are inspections and services which should
be performed at least twice a year (for instance, each
spring and fall). You should let your
GM
dealer’s
service department or other qualified service center do
these
jobs.
Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
INSPECTION
OR
SERVICE
Steering,
Suspension and
Front-Wheel-
Drive Axle
Boot and Seal
Inspection
Exhaust System
Inspection
Throttle
Linkage
Inspection
WHAT
SHOULD BE DONE
Inspect the front and rear suspension
and steering system for damaged,
loose or missing parts, signs of wear,
or lack of lubrication. Inspect the
power steering lines and hoses for
proper hookup, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then
inspect the drive axle boot seals for
damage, tears or leakage. Replace-
seals if necessary.
Inspect the complete exhaust
system. Inspect the body near the
exhaust system. Look for broken,
damaged, missing or out-of-position
parts as well as open seams, holes,
loose connections, or other
conditions which could cause a heat
build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See
“Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
Inspect the throttle linkage for
interference
or
binding, and for
damaged
or
missing parts. Replace
parts as needed.
308
INSPECTION
OR SERVICE
Brake System
Inspection
WHAT SHOULD BE DONE
Inspect the complete system. Inspect
brake lines and hoses for proper
hookup, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads
for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Also inspect drum brake
linings for wear and cracks. Inspect
other brake parts, including drums,
wheel cylinders, calipers, parking
brake, etc. Check parking brake
adjustment.
You
may need to have
your brakes inspected more often
if
your driving habits or conditions
result
in
frequent braking.
NOTE: A low brake fluid level can
indicate worn disc brake pads which
may need
to
be serviced. Also,
if
the
brake system warning light stays on
or comes
on,
something may be
wrong with
the
brake system. See
“Brake System Warning Light”
in
the Index. If your anti-lock brake
system warning light stays on or
comes on, something may be wrong
with
the
anti-lock brake system. See
“Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light”
in
the Index.
Section
D:
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
NOTE:
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtained from your
GM
dealer.
USAGE
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
FLUID/LUBRICANT
GM Goodwrench Motor Oil or
equivalent for API service SG
Energy Conserving I1 oils of the
proper viscosity. The
“SG”
designation may be shown alone or
in
combination with others, such as
“SG/CC,” “SG/CD,”
or
“SF,SG,CC,” etc.
To
determine the
preferred viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see “Engine Oil” in the
Index.
50/50
mixture of water (preferably
distilled) and good quality ethylene
glycol base antifreeze (GM
Part
No.
1052753 or equivalent) conforming
to GM Specification 1825M or
approved recycled coolant
conforming to GM Specification
1825M.
USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT
Hydraulic Brake
System
Delco Supreme
1
l@ Brake Fluid
(GM Part
No.
1052535) or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Parking Brake
Category LB or GC-LB (GM Part
requirements
of
NLGI Grade 2,
Guides Chassis lubricant meeting
No. 1052497 or equivalent).
Power Steering GM Hydraulic Power Steering Fluid
System (GM Part
No.
1052884) or
Automatic DEXRON@ IIE Automatic
Transaxle Transmission Fluid (GM Part
No.
equivalent.
1234588 1).
Key Lock Lubricate with Multi-Purpose
Cylinders Lubricant (GM Part
No.
12345120),
synthetic
SAE
5W-30 engine oil or
silicone lubricant (GM Part
No.
1052276 or 1052277).
Automatic
Transaxle Shift Engine oil.
Linkage
Supercharger Supercharger
Oil
(GM Part No. 12345982)
USAGE
Chassis
Lubrication
Windshield
Washer Solvent
Hood Latch
Assembly
a. Pivots and
Spring Anchor
b. Release Pawl
Hood and Door
Hinges
Weatherstrips
FLUIDlLUBRICANT
Chassis lubricant meeting
requirements
of
NLGI Grade
2,
Category LB
or
GC-LB (GM Part
No.
1052497 or equivalent).
GM Optikleen@ Washer Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515) or
equivalent.
a. Engine oil.
b. Chassis lubricant meeting
requirements
of
NLGI Grade 2,
Category LB or GC-LB (GM Part
No.
1052497 or equivalent).
Engine oil or Lubriplate Lubricant
(GM Part
No.
1050109).
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part
No.
12345579 or equivalent).
See “Specifications
Chart”
in the Index for
recommended replacement filters, valves and spark
plugs.
Section
E:
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the
date, odometer reading and who performed
the
service
in the columns indicated. When completing the
Maintenance Performed column, insert the numbers
from
the
Schedule
I
or Schedule
I1
maintenance charts
which correspond
to
the
maintenance performed. Also,
you
should retain all maintenance receipts. Your owner
information portfolio
is
a convenient place to store
them.
Maintenance Record
ODOMETER
DATE MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
READING SERVICED
BY
@)
Part
8
Customer Assistance Information
1
m
Here
you
will
find out how to contact Buick
if
you need assistance. This part also tells you how to obtain service
publications and how to report any safety defects.
Part
8
includes:
Customer Satisfaction
Customer Assistance for Hearing/Speech Impaired
........................................
3
14
Reporting Safety Defects
............................................................
3
15
ServicePublications
................................................................
316
Customer
Satisfaction
Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and Buick. Normally, any problems with the sales
transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be
resolved by your dealer’s Sales or Service Departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your
concern has not been resolved
to
your satisfaction, the
following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE
--
Discuss your problem
with
a member
of
dealership management. Complaints can often be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the Sales, Service, or Parts Manager,
contact the owner
of
the dealership or the General
Manager.
313
1
STEP TWO
--
If
after contacting a member of
Dealership Management, it appears your problem cannot
be resolved by the dealership without further help,
contact the Buick Customer Assistance Center by
calling 1-800-521 -7300. In Canada, contact GM
of
Canada Customer Assistance Center in Oshawa by
calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854
(French).
In Mexico, call 254- 17-86. In Puerto Rico or
U.S.
Virgin
Islands, call 1-809-763- 13 15. In all other overseas
locations, contact GM International Export Sales in
Canada by calling
1
-4 16-644-4 1
12.
For prompt assistance, please have the following
information available to give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
0
0
0
0
0
Your name, address, telephone number
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
from
the
vehicle registration or title, or the plate
attached to the left top of
the
instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
Nature of problem
In order
to
give your inquiry prompt attention, please
call
the toll-free number listed above. However, if you
wish to write Buick, write to Buick Motor Division,
Customer Assistance Center, 902 E. Hamilton Avenue,
Flint, MI 48550. A listing of all Buick Zone Offices and
offices outside the
U.S.
which can assist you can also be
found in
the
warranty booklet.
When contacting Buick, please remember that your
problem will likely be resolved in the dealership, using
the dealership's facilities, equipment and personnel.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you
have a problem.
Customer Assistance for the Hearing
or Speech Impaired
To assist owners
who
have hearing difficulties, Buick
has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices
for the Deaf) equipment
in
its Customer Assistance
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY)
can communicate with Buick by dialing:
1
-800-TD-BUICK. (TDD users in Canada can dial
1-800-263-3830.)
314
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If
you
believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
you
should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition
to
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it
may open an
investigation, and
if
it finds that a safety defect exists in
a
group
of
vehicles,
it
may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you,
your dealer, or
General Motors.
To
contact NHTSA,
you
may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0 123 in the
Washington, D.C. area)
or
write to:
NHTSA,
U.S.
Department
of
Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE CANADIAN
GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and
you
believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada at Box
8880
Ottawa, Ontario
K1G
352.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope
you’ll
notify
us.
Please call
us
at 1-800-521-7300
,
or write:
Buick Motor Division
Customer Assistance Center
902
E.
Hamilton Avenue
Flint, Mi
48550
In Canada, please call
us
at 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Center
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H
8P7
315
Service Publications
Information on how to obtain Product Service
Publications, Subscriptions and Indexes as described
below is applicable only in the fifty
U.S.
states (and the
District of Columbia) and only for cars and light trucks
with
GVWR
less than
10,000
pounds
(4
536
kg).
In Canada, information pertaining
to
Product Service
Bulletins and Indexes can be obtained by writing
to:
General Motors
of
Canada Limited
Service Publications Department
1908
Colonel Sam Dr.
Oshawa, Ontario L1H
8P7
Buick regularly sends
its
dealers useful service bulletins
about Buick products. Buick monitors product
performance in the field. We then prepare bulletins for
servicing our products better. Now, you can get these
bulletins too.
Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain to the
proper use and care
of
your vehicle. Some describe
costly repairs. Others describe inexpensive repairs
which, if done on time with the latest parts, may avoid
future costly repairs. Some bulletins tell a technician
how to repair a new or unexpected condition. Others
describe a quicker way to fix your vehicle. They can
help a technician service your vehicle better.
Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a small
number
of
cars or trucks. Your Buick dealer or a
qualified technician may have to determine if a specific
bulletin applies to your vehicle.
You can subscribe to all Buick bulletins. This way you’ll
get them as they come out. You can wait a while and get
an index
to
the bulletins. You can also get individual
bulletins. However, you’ll need the index
to
identify
them.
Subscriptions
You can subscribe to all Buick Product Service
Publications (PSP’s). This will include bulletins for all
cars sold by Buick and will not be limited
to
PSP’s
applicable to any particular model. When
you
buy
a
subscription,
you
will receive the PSP’s in periodic
mailings, shortly after they come out.
A
subscription
costs
U.S.
$86.50 ($106.50 including a special binder)
and it entitles you to all PSP’s published by Buick
during the model year. You can purchase a subscription
by sending a check or money order to Service
Publications,
Post
Office Box 1901, Flint, Michigan,
48501, along with the order form located
in
the
following text. You may get additional subscription
ordering forms by calling the toll-free number shown
in
the following text.
Individual
PSP’s
If you don’t want to buy all the PSP’s issued by Buick
for all models in the model year,
you
can buy individual
PSP’s, such as those which may pertain to a particular
model.
To
do this, you will first need to
see
our index
of
PSP’s. It provides
a
variety
of
information. Here’s what
you’ll
find in the index and how you can get one:
What
You’ll Find in the Index:
A
list of all PSP’s published by Buick in a model
year PSP’s covering all models of Buick cars are
listed in the same index.
Ordering information
so
you can buy the specific
PSP’s you may want.
Price information for the PSP’s you may want to
buy.
How
You Can Get an Index:
Indexes are published periodically. Most of the PSP’s
which could potentially apply to the most recent Buick
models will be listed in the most recent publication for
that model year. This means you may want to wait until
the end
of
the model year before ordering an index, if
you are interested in buying PSP’s pertaining to a
current model year car or truck.
Some PSP’s pertaining to a particular model year
vehicle may be published in later years, and these would
be listed in the later year’s index. When
you
order an
index for a model year that is not over yet, we’ll send
you
the most recently published issue. Check the
ordering form for indexes for earlier model years.
Cut out the ordering form, fill it out, and mail
it
in. We
will then see to it that an index
is
mailed to
you.
There is
no charge for indexes for the 1989-1993 model years.
Toll-Free Telephone Number
If
you
want an additional ordering form for an index or a
subscription, just call toll-free and we’ll be happy to
send
you
one. Automated recording equipment will take
your name and mailing address, The number to call is
1-800-551-4123.
Copies at Participating Dealers
Copies of Indexes and individual PSP’s are at your
participating Buick dealer. You can ask to see them.
A VERY IMPORTANT REMINDER: These PSP’s are
meant for technicians. They are not meant for the
“do-it-yourselfer.” Technicians have the equipment,
tools,
safety instructions, and know-how to do
a
job
quickly and safely.
Buick Service Publications
You can get these by using the order form:
a
N
R
319
Part
9
Index
.
Ace
(Ignition Key Position)
........................
75
Accessory Power. Retained
.........................
76
Adding
Brake Fluid
..................................
263
Coolant
.....................................
259
Electrical Equipment
......................
140, 286
Engineoil
...................................
252
Power Steering Fluid
..........................
261
Transaxle/Transmission Fluid
....................
256
Windshield Washer Fluid
...........................
262
Additives, Engine Oil
.............................
254
Adjustment, Brake
...............................
175
Adult Safety Belt Usage
.............................
25
AirBag
..........................................
34
Aircleaner
.....................................
255
Air
Conditioner
.............................
132, 137
Air
Outlets
.....................................
130
Air System
.................................
132, 137
Alcohol, Driving Under the Influence of
..............
167
Alcohol
in
Gasoline
..............................
243
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning
.......................
283
AM
Radio
Reception
.............................
139
AM Stereo Radio Reception
.........................
140
Antenna
.......................................
156
Antifreeze
......................................
258
Antilock Brake System
...........................
172
Antilock Braking System Warning Light
..............
120
Anti-TheftTips
...................................
71
Anti-Theft Feature, Delco LOC I1
....................
153
Appearance Care
..................................
278
Appearance Care and Materials
.....................
285
Armrest, Storage
................................
113
Ashtrays
..
:
......................................
115
Astroroof
......................................
109
Audio Systems
..................................
139
Automatic Air Conditioning System
.................
133
Automatic Door Locks
.............................
63
Automatic Mirror
................................
106
Automatic Overdrive
..............................
82
Automatic Pull-Down, Trunk
........................
65
Automatic Transaxle
..............................
80
I
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
.........................
256
Automatic Transaxle Torque Lock
...................
196
321
Baby. Holding a
.................................
45
Battery
........................................
265
.
Battery Cables, Starting With
.......................
212
Battery Warning Light
............................
126
Blizzard,
If
You’re Caught in a
.....................
199
Blood Alcohol Level
.............................
167
“Blowout,
”
Tire
.................................
229
Boat, Towinga
..................................
201
Brake
Adjustment
..................................
175
Fluid
.......................................
263
Lining Replacement, How to Drive After
.......
74, 264
Master Cylinder
..............................
263
Brake-Transaxle
Shift
Interlock
...................
80,
87
Brake System, Antilock Warning Light
...............
172
Brake System Warning Light
.......................
119
Brake Wear Indicators,
Disc
.......................
174
Brakes, Antilock
................................
172
Brakes, Rear
.....................................
175
Braking
........................................
171
Braking Emergencies
.............................
176
Braking
If
Your Engine Stops
......................
172
Break-In, New Vehicle
............................
-74
Break-In Schedule, When Towing a Trailer
............
202
Parking
......................................
84
PedalTravel
.................................
175
Bulbchart
.....................................
291
Bulb Replacement. Headlamp
......................
266
Bulb Replacement Taillamp
........................
267
Bulbs. Halogen
..................................
265
Bulbs. Turn Signal
................................
92
camper. Towing a
..............................
201
Capacities
......................................
292
Cap. Radiator Pressure
............................
261
Carbon Monoxide in Exhaust
.......................
88
Care. Appearance
................................
278
Cassette Tape Player Care
.........................
155
Cautions. Safety
..................................
10
CB Radio. Adding A
.............................
140
Cellular Telephone. Adding a
......................
140
Chains. Tire
....................................
277
“Change Oil Soon” Light
..........................
125
Change Oil. When to
.........................
125. 251
Changing a Flat Tire
..............................
229
Charge. Battery. Warning Light
.....................
127
“Check Oil Level” Light
..........................
124
Engine Coolant
...............................
258
Engine Oil Level
...............................
252
Power Steering Fluid
..........................
.26
1.
Safety Belt Systems
............................
57
Transaxle Fluid
...............................
256
Checking
BrakeFluid
..................................
263
322
Under the Hood
.............
...................
248
Windshield Washer Fluid
..........................
262
Chemical Paint Spotting
...........................
284
Child Restraints
..................................
46
Children and Safety Belts
.......................
4434
Cigarette Lighter
................................
1 16
Circuit Breakers
.................................
287
CityDriving
....................................
187
Cleaner, Air
....................................
255
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels
............................
283
Fabric
......................................
279
Glass
.......................................
281
Inside Your Car
...............................
278
Outside
Your
Car
.............................
282
Power Antenna
...............................
156
Safety Belts
..................................
281
Top of the Instrument Panel
.....................
280
Underbody
of
Your Car
........................
284
vinyl or Leather
..............................
280
Weather
Strips
...............................
-283
White Sidewall Tires
...........................
283
Windshield and Wiper Blades
....................
281
Comfort Control System
..........................
130
Clock, Setting the
.....................
142,145,148, 151
Closed-In Places, Don’t Idle in
......................
89
COinExhaust
...................................
88
Color of Road Signs
..............................
160
Comfort Control and Audio Systems
.................
129
Compact Disc Care
..............................
155
Compact Spare Tire
..............................
237
Contents. Table of
.................................
9
Contra1 of a Vehicle
..............................
170
Control. Loss of
.................................
180
Controls. Features and
.............................
59
Convex Outside Mirror
...........................
108
Convenience Net
................................
109
Coolant. Engine
.................................
258
Coolant. Engine. Warning Light
....................
123
Coolant. Safety Warnings About
....................
224
Courtesy Lights
.................................
113
Covers. How to Remove Wheel
.....................
231
Cruise Control
..................................
-96
Cruise Control. Change Speed With
..................
98
Cruise Control. Turning
Off
........................
100
Cruise Control. Using on Hills
......................
100
Curves. Driving on
...............................
176
Customer Assistance Information
...................
313
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
....................
313
D
(Drive) Third Gear
.............................
82
@
Automatic Overdrive
...........................
82
Damage To Finish
...............................
283
Damage to Sheet Metal
...........................
283
Daytime Running Lights
...........................
103
Dead Battery. What To Do
.........................
212
Defensive Driving
...............................
166
Defogger. Rear Window
......................
136. 139
Damagewarnings
................................
11
323
Defogging
.....................................
135
Defrost
....................................
136. 138
Delco Sound Systems
............................
139
Disc Brake Wear Indicators
........................
174
Disposal, Used Oil
...............................
255
Door Ajar Light
..................................
128
DoorLocks
......................................
62
Door Locks, Automatic
............................
63
Downhill Parking
................................
194
Downshifting
....................................
82
AtNight
....................................
181
Defensively
..................................
166
Drunk
.......................................
167
In a Foreign Country
...........................
245
In Cities
......................................
187
In
Fog, Mist or Haze
...........................
186
InRain
.....................................
183
In
Winter
.....................................
197
On a Long Trip
...............................
190
On Freeways
.................................
188
On Hill and Mountain Roads
....................
192
On Snow or Ice
...............................
198
Through Deep Standing Water
....................
79
Drunken Driving
.................................
167
Dual Automatic ComforTemp Climate Control
.........
133
Dimensions
....................................
290
Driving
-0nCurves
...................................
176
324
Fasteners. Replacement
..........................
242
Features and Controls
.............................
59
Fetus. Risk to
..
From Safety Belt
Use
................
39
Filling Your Fuel Tank
............................
246
Filter. Oil
..................................
254. 292
Finish Care
.....................................
282
Finish Damage
..................................
283
First Gear. When to Use
............................
83
FlatTire
.......................................
228
Flooded Engine. Starting
...........................
76
Fluid
Fuels in Foreign Countries
.........................
245
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
........................
287
Fuseusage
.....................................
288
Gages
Engine Coolant Temperature
....................
122
Engine Oil Pressure
...........................
123
Fuel
........................................
118
Volts
.......................................
127
Garage Door Opener Storage
.......................
110
Gasoline
.......................................
244
Gasoline Tank. Filling Your
........................
246
Gear Positions
...................................
80
Glass Cleaning
..................................
281
Graphic Symbols
.................................
12
Guard Against Theft
..............................
71
Guide En Francais
.................................
2
Capacities
...................................
292
Brake
.......................................
263
Power Steering
...............................
261
Transaxle/Transmission
........................
256
Windshield Washer
............................
262
Fluids and Lubricants Recommended
................
309
FM Stereo Radio Reception
........................
139
Fog. Driving
in
..................................
186
Foreign Operation
...............................
245
Francais. Guide
En
.................................
2
Freedom Battery
.................................
265 Halogen Bulbs
.................................
265
Freeway Driving
................................
188 Hazard Warning Flasher
...........................
210
FrenchLanguageManual
...........................
2 Haze. Drivingin
.................................
186
Front Towing Hook-Up
...........................
219 Headlamp Bulb Replacement
.......................
266
Fuel
..........................................
243 Headlight High-Low Beam Switch
...................
93
Fuel Tank. Filling Your
...........................
246 Head Restraints
..................................
18
FuelGage
......................................
118 Headlightonwarning
............................
101
325
...........
......
......__,
...__
...........
~~
-~
__~
~~~~
Hearing Impaired Customer Assistance
...............
3 14
Heater
.....................................
135. 138
Heater. Engine Block
..........................
79. 254
High Speed. Shifting When Your Eogine is Running
.....
82
“Highway Hypnosis’’
.............................
19 1
Hill and Mountain Roads
..........................
192
Hills. Parking on
................................
194
Hitches. Trailer
..................................
204
Holding a Baby
in
Your Car
.........................
45
Hood. Opening the
...............................
248
Horn
...........................................
90
Hot Coolant Warning Light
........................
122
Hot Engine. Safety Warnings About
.................
221
Hydroplaning
...................................
185
Ice. Driving on
.................................
198
Identification Label. Service Parts
...................
286
Identification Number. Vehicle
.....................
286
Idling Your Engine
................................
87
If
You’re Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow
...........
239
Ignition Key Positions
.............................
75
Indicator. Turn Signal
.............................
92
Indicators. Disc Brake Wear
.......................
174
Indicators. Warning Lights and Gages
................
117
Infant Restraint
...................................
46
Inflation. Tire
...................................
271
Illuminated Entry System
...........................
70
Inside Mirror
...................................
106
Inspection. Tires
.................................
272
Instrument Panel
................................
1
16
Interior Cleaning
................................
278
Interlock. BrakeRransaxle Shift
..................
80.
87
Introduction How
To
Use This Manual
................
10
J
ack. Tire
.....................................
230
Jacking Up the Car
...............................
230
Jump Starting
...................................
212
Keys
..........................................
60
Keyless Entry System. Remote
......................
66
Kilometer Indicator
..............................
117
Label. Service Parts Identification
..................
286
Lamp Monitors
..................................
105
Lane Change Indicator
.............................
91
Lap-Shoulder Belt Usage by Children
.................
44
Leaving Your Vehicle
..............................
64
Level Control Electronic
..........................
112
License Plate Holder, Rear
.........................
115
Light, Safety Belt
.................................
19
Light, Turn Signal Indicator
.........................
92
Lighter, Cigarette
................................
116
Daytime. Running
.............................
103
LapBelt
........................................
40
Lights
Gages and Warning Indicators
...................
117
Panel
.......................................
101
Time Out Feature
.............................
113
Traffic
......................................
165
“On” Warning
................................
101
Operation
....................................
92
Loading Your Vehicle
............................
268
Locks. Door
.....................................
62
Locks. Rear Door Security
..........................
69
Long Distance Driving
............................
190
Loss of Control
.................................
180
Low Oil Pressure. Warning Light
...................
124
LowFuelLight
.................................
119
Maintenance
Inspections
..................................
308
Record
......................................
311
Schedule
....................................
293
Underbody
..................................
284
Malfunction Indicator Light
........................
126
Manualseat
.....................................
14
Markings, Pavement
.............................
166
Master Cylinder, Brake
...........................
263
Memory Seat and Mirrors
..........................
15
Methanol in Gasoline
.............................
243
Mirrors
Automatic
...................................
106
Convex Outside
..............................
108
Heated Outside Rearview
.......................
108
Inside
......................................
106
Outside
.....................................
108
Mist, Driving in
.................................
186
Mobile Telephone, Adding a
.......................
140
Monitors, Lamp
.................................
105
Mountain Driving
................................
192
MTBE In Gasoline
...............................
243
N
(Neutral) Gear Position
.........................
81
Netconvenience
................................
109
New Vehicle “Break-In”
...........................
74
NightDriving
...................................
181
Nightvision
....................................
182
Notices About Damage
............................
11
Octane Required for Your Car
.....................
243
Odometer
......................................
117
Odometer. Trip
..................................
117
Off (Ignition Key Position)
.........................
76
Off
Road Recovery
..............................
178
Oil. Change Your Engine
......................
25
1.
293
Oil. Engine
.....................................
251
Oil Pressure Warning Light
........................
123
Operation in Foreign Countries
.....................
245
Overdrive. Automatic
.............................
82
Overheated Engine
...............................
221
327
P
(Park) Position
................................
80
Paint Spotting
...................................
284
Panel Lights
....................................
101
Park. Shifting Into
................................
86
Park. Shifting Out of
..............................
87
Parking Brake
....................................
84
Parking on Hills
.................................
194
Parking Over Things That Bum
......................
88
Passing
........................................
178
PASS-Key. Theft Deterrent System
...................
73
Pavement Markings
..............................
166
Pedal Travel. Brake
..............................
176
Perception Time in Braking
........................
171
Polishing and Waxing
............................
282
Power
Antenna Care
................................
156
DoorLocks
...................................
62
Seat Controls
..................................
14
Steering
.....................................
176
Steering Fluid
................................
261
Windows
.....................................
90
Pregnancy. Use of Safety Belts During
................
39
Pressure. Tire
...................................
271
Problems on the Road
............................
209
Proper Safety Belt Usage for Adults
..................
25
Publications Order Form
..........................
3 19
Publications. Service
.............................
3
16
Pull-Down. Automatic Trunk
........................
65
Push-Starting Your Car
...........................
212
R
(Reverse) Gear Position
.........................
81
Racing. Shifting When Your Engine is
................
82
Radiator Overheating
.............................
221
Radiator Pressure Cap
............................
261
Radio. Two-way. Adding a
........................
140
Radio Systems
..................................
139
Rain. Driving in
.................................
183
Reaction Time in Braking
.........................
171
Reading Lights
..................................
104
RearBrakes
....................................
175
Rear Door Security Lock
...........................
69
Rear License Plate Holder
.........................
115
Rear Passenger ComforTemp
.......................
130
Rear Towing
Hook-Ups
...........................
220
Rear Window Defogger
.......................
136. 139
Reclining Front Seatbacks
..........................
16
Recovery.
Off
Road
...............................
178
Recreational Vehicle Towing
.......................
201
Remote Keyless Entry System
.......................
66
Remote Trunk Release
.............................
65
Replaceable Light Bulbs
..........................
291
Replacing Brake System Parts
......................
264
Replacing Safety Belts
...................
:
.........
57
Replacing Wheels
...............................
276
Reporting Safety Defects
..........................
315
Restarting Your Car When
It’s
Moving
................
76
Restraint. Child
..................................
46
Restraint Systems. Checking Your
....................
57
Restraints. Head
..................................
18
Replacing Tires
.................................
273
Retained Accessory Power
..........................
76
Reverse Gear Position
.............................
81
“Riding” the Brakes
..............................
17 1
Road Signs
.....................................
160
Roads. Hill and Mountain
..........................
192
Rocking Your Vehicle
............................
239
Rotation. Tire
...................................
272
Run (Ignition Key Position)
.........................
76
Running Lights. Daytime
..........................
103
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
............
89
Safety Belt Care
................................
281
Safety Belt Extender
..............................
57
Safety Belt Reminder Light
.........................
19
Safety Belt Replacement
...........................
57
Safety Belt. Lap
..................................
40
Safety Belt. Lap-Shoulder
..........................
26
Safety Belt. Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
.............
28
Safety Belt Usage By Adults
........................
25
Safety Belt Usage By Children
......................
44
Safety Belt Usage During Pregnancy
..................
39
Safety Belts
.....................................
13
Safety Belts. Center. Adult Passenger
.................
40
Safety Belts. Cleaning
............................
281
Safety Belts. Questions About
.......................
24
Safety Belts. Rear Seat Passengers
...................
41
Safety Belts. Right Front Adult Passenger
..............
40
Safety Belts.
Too
Loose
............................
30
Safety Belts. Torn
.................................
58
Safety Belts. Twisted
..............................
33
Safety Belts. Why They Work
.......................
20
Safety Belts. Worn Under Arm
.......................
32
Safety Defects. Reporting
.........................
315
Safety Warnings
..................................
10
Scheduled Maintenance Services
....................
296
Seat Adjustment
...............................
14.
58
Seats and Safety Belts
.............................
13
Seat Controls
....................................
14
Second Gear. When to Use
.........................
82
Securing
a
Child Restraint
..................
46.47.50.
52
Security Light
....................................
73
Security Lock. Rear Door
..........................
69
Service Tips
.....................................
242
Service and Appearance Care
......................
241
“Service Engine Soon” Warning Light
...............
126
Service Parts Identification Label
...................
286
Service Publications
..............................
316
Setting
the
Clock
.....................
142.145.148. 151
Setting the Trip Odometer
.........................
117
ShapeofRoadSigns
.............................
163
Sheet Metal Damage
.............................
283
Shift Brake-Transaxle Interlock
...................
80.
87
Shift Lever Positions
.............................. 80
Shifting Into Park
.................................
86
Shifting Out
Of
Park
..............................
87
Signaling Turns
...................................
91
Skidding
.......................................
180
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
.......................
28
Signs. Road
....................................
160
329
Snow or Ice. Driving on
...........................
198
Snowstorm.
If
You’re Caught in a Bad
...............
199
Solvent-Type Cleaner on Fabric
....................
279
Sound Equipment. Adding
.........................
140
Sound Systems
..................................
140
SpareTire
......................................
237
Specifications Chart
..............................
292
Speech Impaired, Customer Assistance for
............
314
Speedometer
....................................
117
Stains, Removing
................................
280
Start (Ignition Key Position)
........................
76
Starting Your Engine
..............................
76
Starting Your Car if the Battery is “Dead”
.............
212
Steam From Hot (Overheated) Engine
................
221
Steep Hill Parking
...............................
194
Steering in Emergencies
...........................
177
Steering Tips
...................................
176
Steering Wheel, Tilt
...............................
90
Steering Without Power Assist
.....................
176
Stereo Sound Systems
............................
139
Storage Armrest
.................................
113
Storage,
.
Garage Door Opener
......................
11
0
Storing Your Car
................................
265
Stuck, If Your Ignition Key is
.......................
76
Stuck,
If
Your Car is
...............................
239
Steering
.......................................
176
Subscribing to Buick Product Service Publications
......
317
Sunroof
........................................
‘109
SunVisors
.....................................
114
Supercharged Engine
.............................
250
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint System (SIR)
.........
34
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint System Light
.........
35
Symbols on Road Signs
...........................
164
Symbols Used on Your Car
.........................
12
Table of Contents
.................................
9
Tachometer
.....................................
127
Taillamp Bulb Replacement
........................
267
Tamper-Resistance
of
Odometer
....................
117
Tape Player Care
................................
155
Theft Deterrent System, PASS-Key
...................
73
Theft Deterrent System, Universal
....................
71
Third Gear, When
to
Use
............................
82
Tilt Steering Wheel
...............................
90
Time, Setting the
.....................
142,145,148, 151
Time Out Feature, Lights
..........................
113
Tire, Flat
.......................................
228
Tire Inflation
...................................
271
Tire Inspection and Rotation
.......................
272
Tire Quality Grading
.............................
274
Tires, When to Replace
...........................
373
Tires, White Sidewall Cleaning
.....................
283
Torn Safety Belts
.................................
58
Torque Lock (Automatic Transaxle)
.................
196
Theft
...........................................
71
Thermostat
.....................................
261
....................................
Tire Balance 275 Tirechains
.....................................
277
Tires
..........................................
270
330
Towing a Trailer
.................................
201
Towing Your Buick
..............................
2 17
Traction Control System
..........................
174
Traction Control System Warning Light
..............
174
Trademarks. GM
..................................
2
Traffic Lights
...................................
165
Traffic Officer
..................................
166
Trailer Brakes
...................................
204
Trailer Towing
..................................
201
Transaxleflransmission Automatic
...................
80
Transaxle Fluid
..................................
256
Travel. Brake Pedal
..............................
175
Trip Odometer
..................................
117
Trunk Ajar Light
................................
128
Trunk Release. Remote
............................
65
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
...............
91
Tun Signalmeadlight Beam Lever
...................
91
Twilight Sentinel
................................
102
Twisted Safety Belts
...............................
33
Two Children Wearing the Same Safety Belt
............
55
Underbody Maintenance
.........................
284
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
......................
274
Universal Theft Deterrent
..........................
71
Unleaded Gasoline
...............................
243
Uphill Parking
..................................
195
Upholstery Care
.................................
278
Used Oil. How to Dispose
of
.......................
255
Vehicle Damage. Warnmgs
........................
11
Vehicle Identification Number
......................
286
Vehicle Storage
.................................
265
Vehicle Symbols
..................................
12
Vinyl. Cleaning
.................................
280
Visors. Dual Sun
................................
114
Visor Vanity Mirror
..............................
114
VoltsGage
.....................................
127
Warning
Devices 211
Flasher. Hazard
...............................
210
Light. Antilock Brake System
...................
120
Light. Battery
................................
126
Light. Brake System
...........................
119
Light. Change Oil Soon
........................
125
Light. Check Oil Level
.........................
124
Light. Door Ajar
..............................
128
Light. Engine Coolant Temperature
...............
122
Light. Engine Oil Pressure
......................
123
Light. Security
................................
73
Light. Traction Control System
..................
121
Light. Trunk Ajar
.............................
128
Lights and Indicators on Instrument Panel
..........
117
Warnings. Safety
.................................
10
Washer. Windshield
...........................
94. 281
Wear Indicators. Disc Brake
.......................
174
Weather Strips. Cleaning
..........................
283
.
.....................................
Light. Washer Fluid Low
........................
94
331
-.
_..L.^L...
..
....
.........
~~
......
.
.
...
-._e-
Wet Road Driving
...............................
183
Wheel Alignment
................................
275
Wheel Covers Removal
...........................
231
Wheel Nut Torque
...............................
236
Wheel Replacement
..............................
276
Why Wear Safety Belts
?
...........................
20
Windows. Power
................................
-90
Cleaning
....................................
281
Washer
......................................
94
Washer Fluid
..................................
262
Wipers
.......................................
93
Winter Driving
..................................
197
Wire Wheel Cover
...............................
232
Working On Your Car
............................
242
Worn Tires
.....................................
273
WreckerTowing
.................................
217
White Sidewall Tires. Cleaning
.....................
283
Windshield
_.,.
Your Driving and the Road
.........
,
.............
159
Your Own Signals
...............................
166
Your Vehicle and the Environment
..................
295
Owner’s Record
of
Upkeep
&
Fuel Usage
DATE MILEAGE AMOUNT COMMENTS
333
Owner’s
Record
of
Upkeep
&
Fuel Usage
DATE
MILEAGE AMOUNT
._
.
COMMENTS
334
Owner’s Record
of
Upkeep
&
Fuel
Usage
DATE MILEAGE AMOUNT COMMENTS
Fuel
Mileage
Chart
MILES
PER
GALLON
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
-
10
11 12 13
14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
50 55 60 65 70 75
80
85 90 95
100
105
110 115 120 125 130 135 I40 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180
60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102
108
114 120 126 132 138 144 150 156 162 168 174
180
186 192 198 204 210 216
70 77 84 91 98 105 112 119 126 133 140 147 '154 161 168 175 182 189 196 203 210 217 224 231 238 245 252
80
88
96 104 112 120 128 136
144
152 1.60 168 176 184 192 200 208 216 224 232 240 248 256 264 272 280 288
90 99
108
117 126 135 144 153 162 171 180 189 198 207 216 225 234 243 252 261 270 279 288 297 306 315 324
100
110 120 130 140 150 160 170
180
190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360
110 121 132 143 154 165 176 187 198 209 220 231 242 253 264 275 286 297 308 319 330 341 352 363 374 385 396
120 132 144 156 168
180
192 204 216 228 240 252 264 276 288 300 312 324 336 348 360 372 384 396 408 420 432
130 143 156 169 182 195 208 221 234 247 260 273 286 299 312 325 338 351 364 377 390 403 416 429 442 455 468
140 154 168 182 196 210 224 238 252 266 280 294 308 322 336 350 364 378 392 406 420 .434 448 462 476 490 504
150
165
180
195 210 225 240 255 270 285 300 3 15 330 345 360 375 390 405 420 435 450 465 480 495 5 10 525 540
160 176 192 208 224 240 256 272 288 304 320 336 352 368 384 400 416 432 448 464 480 496
51
2
528 544 560 576
170 187 204 221 238 255 272 289 306 323 340 357 374 391 408 425 442 459 476 493 510 527 544 561 578 595 612
180 198 216 234 252 270 288 306 324 342 360 378 396 414 432 450 468 486 504 522 540 558 576 594 612 630 648
190 209 228 247 266 285 304 323 342 361 380 399 418 437 456 475 494 5 13 532 551 570 589 608 627 646 665 684
200
220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 440 460 480 500 520 540 560 580 600 620 640 660 680 700 720
210
231 252 273 294 3 I5 336 357 378 399 420 441 462 483 504 525 546 567 588 609 630 651 672 693 714 735 756
220 242 264 286 308 330 352 374 396 418 440 462 484 506 528 550 572 594 616 638 660 682 704 726 748 770 792
....
..
THIS
MANUAL
IS
PRINTED
ON
RECYCLED
PAPER
USING
"UM
50%
WASTEPAPER,
10%
POST
CONSUMER
WASTE
.,
.._-
..
...
...
?

Navigation menu